Siemens 6MD85 Manual Download Page 972 | Manualshive

Page: 972 / 1256

background image

If the binary input signal

>Trip relay

is not routed to a binary input of the device (information routing in

DIGSI 5), then the

Input sig. not routed

indication is generated and Trip-circuit supervision is no

longer in effect.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.

[lotcs1be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8-31

Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

Equivalent Resistance R

The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated when
the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is
open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, R

max

results in:

[fofr1b02-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]

So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain activated, R

min

results in:

[fofr1b03-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]

You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values R

min

and R

max

:

Supervision Functions
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System

972

SIPROTEC 5, High-Voltage Bay Controller, Manual

C53000-G5040-C015-9, Edition 11.2017

«
...
970
971
972
973
974
...
»

Summary of Contents for 6MD85

Page 1: ... Contents Introduction 1 Basic Structure of the Function 2 System Functions 3 Applications 4 Function Group Types 5 Control Functions 6 Protection and Automation Functions 7 Supervision Functions 8 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 Functional Tests 10 Technical Data 11 Appendix A Glossary Index ...

Page 2: ...lations nor does it change these All obligations of Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agree ments Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from time to time Document version C53000 G5040 C015 9 02 Edition 11 2017 Version of the product described V7 50 and higher Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2017 All rights reserved The disclosure duplication distribution and editing ...

Page 3: ...ly Further Documentation dwprefdm 221012 01 tif 3 en_US Device manuals Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device The printed manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure Hardware manual The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5 device family Operating manu...

Page 4: ...s as well as operating sequences with tasks based on practical operation and a brief explanation SIPROTEC 5 catalog The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5 Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices and a device selection table Indication of Conformity This produc...

Page 5: ...module or device However it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety as well as to avoid material damage Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of danger DANGER DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken Comply with all instructions in order to avoid death or severe injuries WA...

Page 6: ...bination with third party equipment recommended and approved by Siemens Problem free and safe operation of the product depends on the following Proper transport Proper storage setup and installation Proper operation and maintenance When electrical equipment is operated hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts If proper action is not taken death severe injury or property damage ca...

Page 7: ...t least 3 years since purchase of the Product We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product Any liability for the Open Source Software beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded Furthermore any liability for defects resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by...

Page 8: ...8 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 9: ...nal Log 55 3 1 5 3 Fault Log 56 3 1 5 4 Ground Fault Log 57 3 1 5 5 Setting History Log 59 3 1 5 6 User Log 61 3 1 5 7 Security Log 63 3 1 5 8 Device Diagnosis Log 64 3 1 5 9 Communication Log 65 3 1 5 10 Motor Starting Log 66 3 1 6 Saving and Deleting the Logs 68 3 1 7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 69 3 1 8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On Site Operation Panel 70 3 1 9 Stored Indic...

Page 10: ... 122 3 5 2 10 Settings 126 3 5 2 11 Information List 127 3 6 Date and Time Synchronization 129 3 6 1 Overview of Functions 129 3 6 2 Structure of the Function 129 3 6 3 Function Description 129 3 6 4 Application and Setting Notes 132 3 6 5 Settings 135 3 6 6 Information List 136 3 7 User Defined Objects 137 3 7 1 Overview 137 3 7 2 Basic Data Types 138 3 7 3 Pulse and Energy Metered Values 141 3 7...

Page 11: ...up Types 181 5 1 Power System Data 182 5 1 1 Overview 182 5 1 2 Structure of the Power System Data 182 5 1 3 Application and Setting Notes General Settings 182 5 1 4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3 Phase V 3ph 183 5 1 5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3 Phase I 3ph 186 5 1 6 Settings 189 5 1 7 Information List 191 5 2 Function Group Type Voltag...

Page 12: ...anual Closure for AREC and Process Monitor 224 5 5 9 1 Function Description 224 5 5 9 2 Application and Setting Notes 225 5 5 9 3 Settings 226 5 5 9 4 Information List 226 5 6 Function Group Type Circuit Breaker 1 3 Pole 227 5 6 1 Overview 227 5 6 2 Structure of the Function Group 227 5 6 3 Application and Setting Notes 229 5 6 4 Trip Logic 230 5 6 4 1 Function Description 230 5 6 4 2 Application ...

Page 13: ...t Inputs 270 5 7 6 1 Overview 270 5 7 6 2 Structure of the Function 271 5 7 6 3 Function Description 271 5 7 6 4 Application and Setting Notes 272 5 7 6 5 Settings 276 5 7 6 6 Information List 278 5 7 7 RTD Unit Ethernet 278 5 7 7 1 Overview 278 5 7 7 2 Structure of the Function 278 5 7 7 3 Communication with an RTD Unit 279 5 7 7 4 Application and Setting Notes 280 5 7 7 5 Temperature Sensor 281 ...

Page 14: ...3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker 313 6 2 2 4 Settings 321 6 2 2 5 Information List 323 6 2 3 Disconnector Switching Device 325 6 2 3 1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device 325 6 2 3 2 Application and Setting Notes 329 6 2 3 3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector 331 6 2 3 4 Settings 334 6 2 3 5 Information List 334 6 3 Control Functionality 335 6 3 1 Command Checks and Switch...

Page 15: ...414 6 4 14 1 Description 414 6 4 14 2 Application and Setting Notes External Synchronization 417 6 4 14 3 Settings 418 6 4 14 4 Information List 420 6 4 15 Settings 420 6 4 16 Information List 422 6 5 Switching Sequences 425 6 5 1 Overview of Functions 425 6 5 2 Function Description 425 6 5 3 Application and Setting Notes 427 6 5 4 Settings 430 6 5 5 Information List 431 6 6 User Defined Function ...

Page 16: ...Setting Notes 528 7 1 5 Settings 537 7 1 6 Information List 539 7 2 Automatic Reclosing Function 542 7 2 1 Overview of Functions 542 7 2 2 Structure of the Function 542 7 2 3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions 544 7 2 4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function 546 7 2 4 1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function 546 7 2 4 2 Structure of the Cyclic Au...

Page 17: ...ercurrent Protection Phases 598 7 4 1 Overview of Functions 598 7 4 2 Structure of the Function 598 7 4 3 Filter for RMS Value Gain 599 7 4 3 1 Description 599 7 4 3 2 Application and Setting Notes 600 7 4 3 3 Settings 601 7 4 3 4 Information List 602 7 4 4 Stage with Definite Time Characteristic Curve 602 7 4 4 1 Description 602 7 4 4 2 Application and Setting Notes 606 7 4 4 3 Settings 609 7 4 4...

Page 18: ...mic Settings 662 7 5 8 1 Description 662 7 5 8 2 Application and Setting Notes Advanced Stage 666 7 6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Phases 667 7 6 1 Overview of Functions 667 7 6 2 Structure of the Function 667 7 6 3 Stage Control 667 7 6 3 1 Description 667 7 6 3 2 Application and Setting Notes 668 7 6 4 Stage with Definite Time Characteristic Curve 669 7 6 4 1 Description 669 7 6 4 2 Applic...

Page 19: ...e Char acteristic Curve 730 7 7 7 1 Description 730 7 7 7 2 Application and Setting Notes 732 7 7 7 3 Settings 733 7 7 7 4 Information List 735 7 7 8 Stage with Knee Point Characteristic Curve 736 7 7 8 1 Description 736 7 7 8 2 Application and Setting Notes 737 7 7 8 3 Settings 738 7 7 8 4 Information List 739 7 7 9 Stage with User Defined Characteristic Curve 740 7 7 9 1 Description 740 7 7 9 2 ...

Page 20: ... 772 7 11 8 Information List 772 7 12 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection 774 7 12 1 Overview of Functions 774 7 12 2 Structure of the Function 774 7 12 3 Stage Description Overcurrent Protection Voltage Dependent 775 7 12 3 1 Description 775 7 12 3 2 Application and Setting Notes 777 7 12 3 3 Settings 779 7 12 3 4 Information List 779 7 12 4 Stage Description Voltage Independent Overcurrent ...

Page 21: ...7 16 7 Description 811 7 16 8 Application and Setting Notes 815 7 16 9 Settings 816 7 16 10 Information List 817 7 17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 818 7 17 1 Overview of Functions 818 7 17 2 Structure of the Function 818 7 17 3 Stage Description 819 7 17 4 Application and Setting Notes 820 7 17 5 Settings 822 7 17 6 Information List 823 7 18 Overfrequency Protection 824 7 18 1 Overview...

Page 22: ... P Q 3 Phase 852 7 22 1 Overview of Functions 852 7 22 2 Structure of the Function 852 7 22 3 Active Power Stage 853 7 22 4 Reactive Power Stage 855 7 22 5 Application Example 856 7 22 6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage 857 7 22 7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage 858 7 22 8 Settings 859 7 22 9 Information List 860 7 23 Phase Sequence Switchover 862 7 23 1 Overview of Functions 86...

Page 23: ...92 7 27 2 Structure of the Function 892 7 27 3 Function Description 893 7 27 4 Application and Setting Notes 896 7 27 5 Settings 900 7 27 6 Information List 901 7 28 Temperature Supervision 902 7 28 1 Overview of Functions 902 7 28 2 Structure of the Function 902 7 28 3 Function Description 903 7 28 4 Application and Setting Notes 903 7 28 5 Settings 904 7 28 6 Information List 909 7 29 Arc Protec...

Page 24: ...8 3 2 6 Application and Setting Notes 943 8 3 2 7 Settings 944 8 3 2 8 Information List 945 8 3 3 Signaling Voltage Supervision 945 8 3 3 1 Overview of Functions 945 8 3 3 2 Structure of the Function 945 8 3 3 3 Function Description 946 8 3 3 4 Application and Setting Notes 948 8 3 3 5 Settings 949 8 3 3 6 Information List 950 8 3 4 Voltage Transformer Circuit Breaker 950 8 3 4 1 Overview of Funct...

Page 25: ...tion and Setting Notes 968 8 3 10 5 Settings 968 8 3 10 6 Information List 968 8 3 11 Trip Circuit Supervision 968 8 3 11 1 Overview of Functions 968 8 3 11 2 Structure of the Function 968 8 3 11 3 Trip Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs 969 8 3 11 4 Trip Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input 970 8 3 11 5 Application and Setting Notes 973 8 3 11 6 Settings 973 8 3 11 7 Information List 974...

Page 26: ...ettings 1023 9 6 3 4 Information List 1023 9 6 4 ΣI Method Stage 1024 9 6 4 1 Description 1024 9 6 4 2 Application and Setting Notes 1026 9 6 4 3 Settings 1026 9 6 4 4 Information List 1026 9 6 5 2P Method Stage 1027 9 6 5 1 Description 1027 9 6 5 2 Application and Setting Notes 1030 9 6 5 3 Settings 1031 9 6 5 4 Information List 1031 9 6 6 I2t Method Stage 1032 9 6 6 1 Description 1032 9 6 6 2 Ap...

Page 27: ...on 1066 10 5 Circuit Breaker Test 1067 10 6 Testing the Negative Sequence Current 1071 10 7 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection 1072 10 8 Functional Test of the Trip Circuit Supervision 1074 10 9 Functional Test for the Phase Rotation Reversal 1075 10 10 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control 1076 10 10 1 Secondary Tests 1076 10 10 1 1 General 1076 10 10 1 2 Checking the Transformer Ta...

Page 28: ...1 20 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 1155 11 21 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1158 11 22 Overfrequency Protection 1159 11 23 Underfrequency Protection 1160 11 24 Underfrequency Load Shedding 1161 11 25 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1163 11 26 3 Phase Power Protection P Q 1165 11 27 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 1166 11 28 Circuit Breaker Failure Protecti...

Page 29: ...es 1207 A 3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 1209 A 4 Standard Variants for 6MD85 1212 A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 1217 A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1223 A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1231 A 8 Connection Examples for Special Applications 1237 Glossary 1239 Index 1253 Table of Contents SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 29 C...

Page 30: ...30 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 31: ...Introduction 1 1 General 32 1 2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 34 1 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 31 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 32: ...gnals for the logic functions Decision about the trip and close commands Storage of indications fault data and fault values for fault analysis Administration of the operating system and its functions such as data storage real time clock communi cation interfaces etc External distribution of information Binary Inputs and Outputs Using the binary inputs and outputs the device receives information fr...

Page 33: ... Brief interruptions in the supply voltage which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally bridged by capacitor storage see also the Technical Data Introduction 1 1 General SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 33 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 34: ...ffered synchronizable clock Modular Concept The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire device series Significant features here include Modular system design in hardware software and communication Functional integration of various applications such as protection control and fault recorder The same expansion and communication modules...

Page 35: ...36 2 2 Adjustment of Application Templates Functional Scope 38 2 3 Function Control 40 2 4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 44 2 5 Information Lists 45 2 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 35 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 36: ...lates Functional Scope Function Groups FG Functions are arranged in function groups This simplifies handling of functions adding and copying The function groups are assigned to primary objects such as transformer or circuit breaker The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks Assignment of functions to current and or voltage transformers assignment of functions to ...

Page 37: ...ups double click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree scprnavi 270514 01_DE 1 en_US Figure 2 1 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 Detail The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area see the following Figure does not correspond to the example scmesfkt 270514 01_DE 1 en_US Figure 2 2 Connecting Measuring Points and Function Groups Basic Structure of the Function 2 ...

Page 38: ...nction blocks As previously described the functions tripping stages and function blocks auto matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group In few cases it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit breaker function group These newly added function groups do not contain protection functions You must individually load the protection functions for your speci...

Page 39: ...w energy siemens com Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device either via e mail or for downloading Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device The procedure is described in the Online Help of DIGSI 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2 2 Adjustment of Application Templates Functional Scope SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 39 C53000 G5040 C015 ...

Page 40: ...et the functions into these modes The function control is shown in Figure 2 3 It is standardized for all functions Therefore this control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions losteurg 040411 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 2 3 General Control of a Function State Control You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state You set the sp...

Page 41: ...Test Test Test On Test Test Test Test The following table shows the possible function states Table 2 2 Possible States of a Function Function State Explanation On The function is activated and operating as defined The prerequisite is that the health of the function is OK Off The function is turned off It does not create any information The health of a disabled func tion always has the value OK Bas...

Page 42: ...unctionality If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message the test bit is set spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted immedi ately The receiver of the GOOSE message is automatically noti fied of transmitter test mode If an object is transmitted via the protection interface the test bit is not transmitted The Test state must also be transmitted as information for this state to be taken...

Page 43: ...s a protection or a monitoring function Further you use this to determine the type and scope of the logging see following table Parameter Value Description No The function works as a protection function It generates an operate indica tion and starts fault recording with pickup During fault recording a fault is created and logged as a fault record in the fault log Yes The function works as a superv...

Page 44: ...and a number This means that structured overall texts and numbers are created The structure of the texts and the reference numbers follow the hierarchy Function group Function Stage Function Block Indication Function group Function Stage Function Block Parameter The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels Depending on the functionality not all hierarchy levels are alwa...

Page 45: ...re ENS ACD ACT SPS and MV etc A type is assigned to the individual data types The following table shows the possible types Type Meaning I Input input signal O Output output signal C Controllable control signal EXAMPLE The following table shows the types for some data types as examples Data Type Type ENS O ACD O ACT O SPS I or O SPC C MV O 2 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2 5 Information Lists S...

Page 46: ...46 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 47: ...ion Communication 97 3 6 Date and Time Synchronization 129 3 7 User Defined Objects 137 3 8 Other Functions 143 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 154 3 10 Device Settings 162 3 11 Security Settings in the Device 171 3 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 47 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 48: ... device with DIGSI 5 The device display and navigation using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external request via general interrogation In DIGSI 5 indications can be tracked spontaneously during online mode in a special indication window Indications can be made accessible to highe...

Page 49: ...t the top of the list The selected indication is shown with a dark background Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information routing matrix or is predefined Every indication contains date time and its state as additional information You will find information about this in chapter 3 1 5 1 General In some logs you are given the option of dele...

Page 50: ...ce use the project tree window If you have not created the device within a project you can also do this via the Online access menu item After selecting the desired log you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device To update it is necessary to synchronize with the log in the device Synchronize the log For this purpose click the appropriate button in the headline of the log see the ...

Page 51: ...ion structure Name Value Quality Cause Number Time stamp date and time Function structure Name Value Log for fault indications Time stamp date and time Relative time Fault number Entry number Function structure Name Value Quality Cause Number Time stamp date and time Fault number Value Log for motor starting indications Time stamp date and time Motor starting time Starting current Starting voltage...

Page 52: ...ber Indication Time stamp date and time Indication Overview of Displayed Quality Attributes If values are shown on the device display or in DIGSI the following quality attributes are different for meas ured values and metered values Table 3 2 Measured Values IEC 61850 Device Display DIGSI Description Detail Quality Validity Good Invalid Questionable X Value The measured value is valid Failure X Fa...

Page 53: ... Structure Path of the signal with the signal name Name Signal name Value Current state of the command Also pay attention to the value quality to check whether the value is up to date Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether the value is up to date Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity Number DIGSI address of the signal Motor startup time Tim...

Page 54: ...y means of battery buffering or storage in the flash memory You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5 The device display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys Configurability of Logs The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs for example ground fault log is laid down in columns of the information routing matrix of DIGSI 5...

Page 55: ...nforma tion about the recording of system incidents please refer to the description of the fault log chapter 3 1 5 3 Fault Log Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window Project Device Process Data Log Operational log The status of the operational log last loaded from the device...

Page 56: ...rational indications which you can adjust individually at any time Fault Log Fault indications are events which arise during a fault They are logged in the fault log with real time stamp and relative time stamp reference point fault occurrence Faults are numbered consecutively in rising order With fault recording engaged a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault logg...

Page 57: ...ult log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing matrix of DIGSI 5 Target Log Fault log column Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmet...

Page 58: ...ice diagnosis log last loaded from the ground fault log is shown to you To update synchronization with the device click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi cation list Figure 3 7 a scgrflmd 191012 01 1 en_US Figure 3 7 Reading the Ground Fault Log with DIGSI 5 Reading on the Device through the On Site Operation Panel To reach the ground fault log from the main menu use the navi...

Page 59: ...ts are recorded in the log for parameter changes This enables you to determine setting changes made are associated with events logged for example faults On the other hand it is possible to prove with fault analyses for example that the current status of all settings truly corresponds to their status at the time of the fault Up to 200 indications can be stored in the setting history log Reading fro...

Page 60: ...es in the Setting History Log For this log there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting changes The following list gives you an overview of this information Table 3 5 Overview of Indication Types Displayed Information Explanation Selection editing Selection of settings group to be edited Reject Rejection of all changes successful PG activation ...

Page 61: ...o 200 indications can be stored in the user defined log Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 To reach the user defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window Project Device Process Data Log User log 1 2 The status of the user defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you To update synchronization with the device click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi...

Page 62: ... and Deleting the Logs Configuration of a User Defined Log The indication capacity of a created user defined log can be configured freely in the associated column of the information routing matrix of DIGSI 5 Target Log U1 or U2 scdiu1u2 280415 01 1 en_US Figure 3 13 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 Example User Defined Log U1 2 System Functions 3 1 Indications 62 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Con...

Page 63: ...isplayed Before this refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline scsecmld 180816 01 1 en_US Figure 3 14 Reading the Security Indications with DIGSI 5 Reading on the Device through the On Site Operation Panel To access the security log from the main menu use the navigation keys on the on site operation panel Main Menu Test Diagnosis Logs Security indications You can navigate ...

Page 64: ...dware defect or compatibility problems and the fallback system is active Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation To reach the device diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window Project Online access Device Device information Logs tab Device diagnosis log The status of the device diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you Before this refresh the c...

Page 65: ... Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the configured communication modules Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 Use the project tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device Online access Device Test suite Communication module Then select J Onboard Ethernet Communication log The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device Befor...

Page 66: ...as primary values Up to 200 indications can be stored in the motor starting log Measurement of the motor statistics starts when the motor state changes to Start Measurement of the motor starting time ends as soon as the motor state changes to Standstill or Running The motor state is obtained from the Motor state detection function No entry is recorded in the motor starting log if the motor state c...

Page 67: ...the on site operation panel Main Menu Indications Motor starting log You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys up down on the on site operation panel Figure 3 21 Reading the Motor Starting Log on the On Site Operation Panel of the Device Deletability The motor starting log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted Read details about this in chapter 3 1 6 Saving...

Page 68: ...imitations apply especially to logs with rele vance for security and after sales security log device diagnosis log setting history log i i NOTE Upon deletion of the fault log the associated fault records are also deleted In addition the meters for fault number and fault record number are reset to 0 In contrast if you delete fault records the content of the fault log including the allocated fault n...

Page 69: ...ch the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window for example opera tional log Project Device Process data Logs Operational log Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device in a special indication window Procedure Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected...

Page 70: ... are displayed A list of a maximum of 6 configurable display lines is offered for each circuit breaker The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display With the parameter _ 139 Fault display under Device Parameter Device settings you determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be displayed for each pickup or only...

Page 71: ...y output contacts of the device and also to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3 1 9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device In your SIPROTEC 5 device you can also configure indications as stored This type of configuration can be used for LEDs as well as for outp...

Page 72: ...nd is pending above the parameterized command period until feedback has been successfully received Note You can realize the functionality of the Lockout ANSI 86 by storing the output relay with the routing option TL Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group You can configure indications of individual functions as stored in a function group This type of configuration can be used for LEDs a...

Page 73: ...ring points The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values SAV in the measured value acquisition chain Figure 3 26 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available In order to limit the bandwidth of the input signals a low pass filter anti aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem is installed downstream After sampling the current input channels are ad...

Page 74: ...s considered A higher sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement Detailed information can be found in the corresponding function description i i NOTE The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power system data starting in chapter 5 1 Power System Data Each measuring point has its own parameters System Functions 3 2 Measured Value Acquisition 74 SIPROTEC 5 High Vol...

Page 75: ... SIPROTEC 5 system Validity using the values good or invalid The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received valid invalid or not received invalid The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also setting a substitute value for the object that is not received see 3 3 2 Quality Processing Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values T...

Page 76: ...ice If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage you can function ally log off the device ahead of time Once you functionally log off the device all data objects generated in the device state values and measured values receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked TRUE This also applies to the output from CFC charts If objects are transferred via a GOOSE m...

Page 77: ...rent functions require customized settings these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function Quality Processing Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding You can find information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing Affected by the User for ...

Page 78: ...state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed Select the property for the selected data object You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet System Functio...

Page 79: ... the application If no value was received the output value is assumed being in safe state Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received the last valid value is forwarded to the application If no value has yet been received the output value is assumed being in safe state Set value to false Applies only to Boolean communication objects Every invalid quality attribute causes the v...

Page 80: ...ion in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode As a result the indication is transmitted with the quality information test The receiving function block recog nizes this for this indication and reacts depending on its own test mode state specified in IEC 61850 7 4 Annex A according to the settings Table 3 9 i i NOTE Follow the sequence of tests First the Functional logof...

Page 81: ...0 False 1 True SPC SPS stVal 0 False 1 True MV mag Floating point range and range of values according to IEEE 754 single precision For controllable types the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas ured values ctlNum 0 stSeld False origin orIdent Substituted by quality processing origin orCat AUTOMATIC_BAY Previous Quality Processing Affected by the User ...

Page 82: ...pBlk Check box is not set Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked FALSE The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are forwarded without change Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked TRUE The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE and processed further using this value The data value is set to the defined substitute value and processed further using this substitute value Interact...

Page 83: ...th the CFC chart quality handling parameter you control whether you want to influence the quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic default setting manner If you select Manual the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi vidual signals Validity good Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed If the device is in test mode or the in...

Page 84: ...pend on whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or without quality processing 1 A CFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked CFC chart is in normal state In CFC charts for incoming data the OperatorBlocked attribute is ignored CFC chart is i...

Page 85: ... 1 i 0 i 1 g 0 g SPLIT_SPS SPLIT_DPS SPLI_XMV The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end This is the case if the building block is interconnected with CFC input data or is connected downstream with a quality processing building block x_SPS In other cases the CFC editor does not allow a connection SPLIT...

Page 86: ... To do this you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear inter locking Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart With the SPLIT_SPS building block split the input signal data type SPS into data value and quality information You can then continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart Use the quality inform...

Page 87: ... data are supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device operating mode i i NOTE Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking see chapter 3 8 1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid loquali3 100611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 3 34 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function Internal In...

Page 88: ...ed loquali2 230212 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 3 35 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal For this signal type SPS you can influence the processing of the quality see overview in Figure 3 34 The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage In the DIGSI 5 project tree double click Information routing In the operating range select the desired binary i...

Page 89: ...etting with only a few exceptions Set the binary value to be processed further to 0 Set the binary value to be processed further to 1 This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applications The function health switches to Warning The input signal source is good The source signal data value is processed further Quality Attribute Test The input signal source and processed function a...

Page 90: ...ng table displays the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute After internal to the SIPROTEC 5 system for example in the direction of a CFC chart To the IEC 61850 interface in buffer Functional state Test thus result of device operating mode Test or function mode Test Unchanged Test TRUE Test TRUE Functional state Off thus result of d...

Page 91: ...ransferred to the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing communica tion connections such as IEC 61850 IEC 60870 5 103 The central device analyzes the data using appro priate programs Function Description The Fault recorder function records the sampled values specific to each device of all analog inputs the inter nally calculated measured values an...

Page 92: ...possible Externally via binary input signal External start for example from an external protection device without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message By way of a configurable input signal Manual start you can start fault records with a configurable length parameter Manual record time With DIGSI 5 you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s With a command fr...

Page 93: ...be uniquely assigned to the event log Fault Memory The device manages its available fault memory dynamically so that the maximum recording capacity is always available When exceeding the limits of the fault memory the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten This means that the most recent recordings are always available The sampling rate type and number of measured value trends to be recor...

Page 94: ...ration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters Pre trigger time Post trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration Parameter Value Description with pickup The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection pickups The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken into account Note When the post trigger time has exp...

Page 95: ...cy Sampling Frequency Setting Range for the Post trigger time Parameter 8 kHz 0 05 s to 4 s 4 kHz 0 05 s to 8 s 2 kHz 0 05 s to 16 s 1 kHz 0 05 s to 24 s Parameter Manual record time Recommended setting value _ 2761 116 Manual record time 0 50 s With the Manual record time parameter you set the length of a recording if the fault recording is acti vated dynamically edge triggered via a separately c...

Page 96: ... Post trigger time 0 05 s to 0 50 s 0 50 s _ 2761 116 Control Manual record time 0 20 s to 20 00 s 0 50 s _ 2761 140 Control Sampling frequency 8 kHz 4 kHz 2 kHz 1 kHz 2 kHz Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Binary IO _ 2731 51 General Mode controllable ENC C _ 2731 52 General Behavior ENS O _ 2731 53 General Health ENS O Binary IO _ 2761 300 Control Start record SPC C _ 2761 30...

Page 97: ...e results are displayed on the device or with DIGSI 5 Protection data for example differential protection data or teleprotection scheme binary data are trans ferred for distance protection and ground fault protection The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection whereby a device of the protection topology assumes the role of the timing master The connection is continuously monitored f...

Page 98: ... types of protection communication Type 1 and type 2 protection communication do not work together in pairs via a protection function Types Description Type 1 Application using differential protection With type 1 the differential protection function is the primary application This application requires the greatest portion of the bandwidth so that with type 1 the number of signals additionally avai...

Page 99: ...ion topology see parameter Local device is device A maximum of 2 protection communications can be integrated in one device see next figure If 2 protection communications of the same type are connected to one another this results in 100 redundancy regarding the transmission route The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest band width for example optical fiber If this c...

Page 100: ... is automatically created Multiple end configurations are an order option In the case of other devices a protection communication of type 2 is created which can be present one or 2 times A distinction is made between the following types of topology Chain topology Ring topology The chain topology is shown in the following figure The protection communications must be of the same type to belong to a ...

Page 101: ...ogy In addition a device in the constellation can be logged off from the topology Protection Interface Information Transfer With the protection interface information transfer customer specific indications and measured values can be communicated via the protection interface with settable update cycles priorities There are 3 different priorities when transferring protection interface information Pri...

Page 102: ...e device and at slots N and P in the plug in module assembly with integrated power supply When using communication converters the connection from the device to the communication converter by a module is established via optical fibers Table 3 11 Plug In Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface Plug In Modules Module Type USART AF 1LDFO Module Type USART AW 2LDFO Module Type USART AG 1...

Page 103: ...le 3 12 Plug In Modules USART AD 1FO and USART AE 2FO Plug In module Plug In Module USART AD 1FO USART AE 2FO Physical Connection 1 x optical serial 820 nm ST connector 1 5 km via 62 5 125 μm multimode optical fibers 2 x optical serial 820 nm ST connector 1 5 km via 62 5 125 μm multimode optical fibers Application Protection interface Sync HDLC IEEE C37 94 X X i i NOTE The USART plug in module typ...

Page 104: ...1 en_US Figure 3 46 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber i i NOTE In order to prevent optical overload of the receiver a 7XV5107 0AA00 attenuator must be used on one side in the fiber optic modules USART AF USART AG USART AU USART AK and USART AV for distances of less than 25 km 50 km System Functions 3 5 Protection Communication 104 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controlle...

Page 105: ...tion via You can find more detailed information in Table 3 13 dwmultim 070611 06 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 49 Connection via Communication Network with a G703 6 Interface The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit s via a communication converter with a G703 6 interface E1 with 2 MBit s or T1 with 1 44 MBit s The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for connecting an additi...

Page 106: ...l protection interface The connection to a repeater is established with 512 kBit s repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3 13 dwmutip8 070611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 52 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37 94 N 64 kBit s Interface Time Slot N 1 2 or 8 i i NOTE The redundancy of different communication connections for the ring topology requires rigorous separa tion of all d...

Page 107: ...ce with index 1 This device functions as the timing master in a protection topology If the timing master is logged off and switched off the device with the next highest device index takes on the function of the timing master The timing master synchronizes the clocks of the other devices of this topology via the protection interfaces The time of the timing master is typically synchronized via a sub...

Page 108: ...s connected via protection interfaces can take place via a high precision GPS second pulse at the time synchronous port G for special differential protec tion applications or synchrophasor measuring devices As a result the transmission time of the communica tion route can be measured and displayed separately in the directions forward and reverse This ensures that the maximum responsivity can be ob...

Page 109: ...as follows Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel Thus is the channel configured with a module DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device Information Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface A text box entitled Protec tion in...

Page 110: ...ination Settings Default setting _ 5131 102 Address of device 1 101 Default setting _ 5131 103 Address of device 2 102 Default setting _ 5131 104 Address of device 3 103 Default setting _ 5131 105 Address of device 4 104 Default setting _ 5131 106 Address of device 5 105 Default setting _ 5131 107 Address of device 6 106 System Functions 3 5 Protection Communication 110 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay...

Page 111: ...NOTE If you use optical fibers for the connection between the devices set the value to 2048 kBit s Default setting _ 5131 125 Number of devices 6 With the Number of devices parameter you set the number of devices actually connected in the device combination in one topology This parameter is set by default to the maximum number of devices permitted for the appropriate constellation The Number of de...

Page 112: ...ations of the same type form a topology For more information on this see chapter 3 5 2 3 Function Description A data bar is exchanged between the devices of a topology connected via protection communication This can be written into or read from by the devices This can be used for exchanging various signals between the devices In this case each signal demands a certain number of data fields dwdaten...

Page 113: ...device reading this information Otherwise they are processed incorrectly on the receiving side The data bar is organized in terms of bits For information on the bit requirement of each signal type refer to Table 3 16 Table 3 14 and Table 3 15 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud rate i i NOTE The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter which has to be set in ...

Page 114: ...easured value is allocated to a definite data area of the bar Figure 3 58 to Figure 3 61 show the routing for a communication topology of protection interface type 1 To transmit signals to other devices these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under Transmit Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single point indications SPS and are routed to position 1 and position 2 of the transmission with t...

Page 115: ...to the Protection Interface in Device 1 scrangmw 021210 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 59 Routing of Measured Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1 System Functions 3 5 Protection Communication SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 115 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 116: ...e original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions These 3 dropout times apply for all data of one transmission priority and are set as parameters scspsemp 021210 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 61 Routing of Single Point Indications Receive to the Protection Interface in Device 1 The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 t...

Page 117: ... is interrupted is entered This state depends on the information In the case of single point indications the state is 0 or 1 In the case of double point indi cations the bit combinations 00 01 10 or 11 are possible in order to directly signal a disturbed position upon failure of the data connection for example Hold is used to retain the state scbausps 021210 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 63 Routing of R...

Page 118: ...lability of protection interface communication within the last minute as percentage Availability of protection interface communication within the last hour as percentage Time delay in the send and receive direction of the telegrams between local and neighboring device You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure see Figure 3 66 sc_diagnose_wskanäle_geräteadresse 2 ...

Page 119: ...lowing indications values are possible Initialized The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state Protection interface connected The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of a device Protection interface disturbance The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time set in parameter _ 5161 107 Disturbance alarm after Protection...

Page 120: ...ated _ 9001 103 Rated apparent power at both ends is equal If a transformer is installed in the line _ 9001 102 Rated voltage and _ 9001 103 Rated apparent power must be adjusted at both ends such that the internally calculated value of the parameter _ 9001 101 Rated current at both ends is equal In order to clarify faults each individual protection interface provides the following binary signals ...

Page 121: ...Measured Values of the Protection Interface The protection interface provides the following measured value to diagnose the protection interface commu nication Measured Value Description _ 5161 308 Tx tel h Telegrams sent during the last hour _ 5161 309 Rx tel h Telegrams received during the last hour _ 5161 310 Tx tel min Telegrams sent during the last minute _ 5161 311 Rx tel min Telegrams receiv...

Page 122: ...g the module slots for example F and the corresponding channel 1 or 2 The following figures show the extensive diagnostic data for the protection interface It is particularly helpful if data failures occur or other irregularities in a communi cation connection for example transmission time fluctuations i i NOTE The diagnostic data can also be read via the device control on the display of the devic...

Page 123: ...ces Log Type Name Values Description Media Status Interface in Direction of Outside Interface Media Status Baud rate 64 kBit s 128 kBit s 512 kBit s 2048 kBit s 30 MBit s unknown HDLC baud rate FO 64 kBit s to 2048 kBit s for 820 Nm USART modules LDFO 30 MBit s for 1300 1500 Nm long distance modules Error case unknown Media Status LinkState N A UP DOWN FO N A always display N A Media Status Transc...

Page 124: ...LPFramesOK Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Incoming telegrams low priority OK HDLC RXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Incoming telegrams high priority faulty HDLC RXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Incoming telegrams low priority faulty HDLC TXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Sending telegrams high priority OK ...

Page 125: ... of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Sending telegrams low priority faulty HDLC Bridge Details Sub nodes Sub nodes Siemens internal special diagnostic for fault search scdiahdl 140912 01 1 en_US Figure 3 70 Diagnostic Data of the Protection Interface Log COM Interface Internal COM Link Interface Between Module and Mainboard System Functions 3 5 Protection Communication SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage B...

Page 126: ...ams high priority faulty COM interface TXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Sending telegrams low priority faulty COM interface Bridge Details Sub nodes Sub nodes Siemens internal special diagnostic for fault search Table 3 22 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface Protection Interfaces Log Type Name Values Description Protection In...

Page 127: ...f 1 PPS synchroni zation telegr and PPS telegr or PPS PPS sync off PPS sync off Ext Synchron _ 9181 114 Ext Synchron PPS pulse loss alarm aft 2 1 s to 60 0 s 2 1 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Device combin _ 5131 52 Device combin Behavior ENS O _ 5131 53 Device combin Health ENS O _ 5131 301 Device combin Status of topo recog ENS O _ 5131 302 Device combin Topology is ENS ...

Page 128: ...61 340 Prot interf 1 Telegram lost SPS O _ 5161 308 Prot interf 1 Tx tel h MV O _ 5161 309 Prot interf 1 Rx tel h MV O _ 5161 310 Prot interf 1 Tx tel min MV O _ 5161 311 Prot interf 1 Rx tel min MV O _ 5161 312 Prot interf 1 Tx err h MV O _ 5161 313 Prot interf 1 Rx err h MV O _ 5161 314 Prot interf 1 Tx err min MV O _ 5161 315 Prot interf 1 Rx err min MV O _ 5161 334 Prot interf 1 Miss tel min M...

Page 129: ...l or via DIGSI 5 Within a system or even beyond it is usually necessary to record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices For SIPROTEC 5 devices the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured Configurable Synchronization Options None default setting The device functions without any external time synchronization The internal time ...

Page 130: ...vice display you can define the local time zone of the device parameter Offset time zone for GMT including the applicable daylight saving times start end and offset of daylight saving time using parame ters This allows the display of the local time i i NOTE For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time this will be taken into account automatically when creating th...

Page 131: ... Time sync error This indication signals after the parameterized time Fault indication after that synchronization using an external time source has failed Time synchronization Leap second This indication signals that a Leap second has occurred during time synchronization using an external GPS receiver protocol variant IRIG B 005 004 with extension according to IEEE C37 118 2005 Time synchronizatio...

Page 132: ...e form of a numerical offset for UTC universal time Application and Setting Notes Parameter Date Format Default setting Date format YYYY MM DD With the Date format parameter you define the local customary format of the date display Parameter Value Description YYYY MM DD Day Month Year Typical European display Example 24 12 2010 YYYY MM DD Month Day Year Typical US representation Example 12 24 2010...

Page 133: ...ource 2 The value of this setting is not evaluated by the device since this protocol either transmits or in the case of local time specifies the appropriate offset to UTC in each set time telegram DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF 77 receiver Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 local Please note There are also clocks that generate a DCF 77 signal representing UTC In this...

Page 134: ...E 1588 timing master In this case SIPROTEC 5 devices operate as slave only clocks IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P and Ethernet Transport The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 UTC Parameter Fault indication after Default setting Fault i...

Page 135: ...Input Offset daylight saving time min Default settings as in the picture above Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Time sync _ 102 Time sync Time source 1 none IRIG B DCF77 PI SNTP IEC 60870 5 103 PROFIBUS DP Modbus DNP3 IEEE 1588 IEC 60870 5 104 none _ 103 Time sync Time source 1 port port J port F port E port P port N port G _ 104 Time sync Time source 1 channel Ch1 Ch2 _ 1...

Page 136: ...0 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Time managem _ 300 Time managem Daylight saving time SPS O _ 301 Time managem Clock set manually SPS O No Information Data Class Type Type Time sync _ 303 Time sync Status time source 1 SPS O _ 304 Time sync Status time source 2 SPS O _ 305 Time sync Time sync error SPS O _ 306 Time sync Leap second SPS O _ 307 Time sync High accuracy SPS O ...

Page 137: ...which are read via binary inputs This function can be deac tivated using the mode The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed The user defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level alongside other function groups as well as within function groups and functions In addition there is a user defined function block control Alongside the aforementioned possibilities presented by us...

Page 138: ...tered in the form of a single point indication or forwarded as the binary result from a CFC chart EXAMPLE Acquisition using binary input further processing in a CFC and or signaling using an LED Single Point Indication Type SPS unsaved Single Point Status Unsaved In contrast to SPS single point indications the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the device restarts For this...

Page 139: ... Intermediate position OFF Disturbed position EXAMPLE Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit breaker switch position Marker Command Type SPC Single Point Controllable This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable marker Integer Status Value Type INS The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result System Fu...

Page 140: ... measured value that can be used as a CFC result for instance i i NOTE Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre sponding function blocks This applies to the following data types Pulse metered values see User defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library Transformer taps Metered values Phase to Ground Measured Values WYE This data type repres...

Page 141: ... in the library ENC Enumerated Setting Controllable The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values SEQ Sequence BSC Binary Controlled Step Position The data type BSC can for example be used to control a transformer tap changer The commands up down can be given i i NOTE Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element If this switching...

Page 142: ...SE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help User defined signals exist as external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column System Functions 3 7 User Defined Objects 142 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 143: ...the switch in the bay sclposi 260116 1 en_US Figure 3 78 Settings for Circuit Breaker Switch Position The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms 1 day in ms increments The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software filter should be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back When activated the Indication timestamp before ...

Page 144: ...edit the settings for this Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block scflatte 180315 1 en_US Figure 3 79 Setting Chatter Blocking The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI They are acces sible as settings in the General function group see the following f...

Page 145: ...ked tempora rily and the Chatter blocking indication is set The blocked input signal is assigned the oscillatory quality Enter a number between 1 and 65535 in this field The number entered corresponds to the time in minutes An entry here is only considered if the number of chatter tests does not equal 0 Subsequent test time During this second test time the number of times a signal changes its stat...

Page 146: ...ocking indication is set After expiry of the settable Chatter idle time during the following Subsequent test time it is checked whether the input signal is still chattering This check is repeated as the No of chatter tests is set to 2 in this example If during the 2nd Subsequent test time it has been detected that the number of state changes of the input signal is within the set No permis state ch...

Page 147: ...tion blocking To set the acquisition blocking proceed as follows In the main menu of the device display use the navigation keys to move to Commands Equipment Aq blkman update If several switching devices are available select the appropriate device for example a circuit breaker using the navigation keys Press the Change softkey Enter the confirmation ID Confirm the process with the softkey marked O...

Page 148: ...easons manual updating is possible only directly through the on site operation panel of the device and not through DIGSI 5 i i NOTE Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850 system interface You can also set the acquisition blocking via a binary input If you want to put the feeder or the switching device in revision you can set the acquisit...

Page 149: ...sition blocking remains set until all the sources are deacti vated After deactivation of the acquisition blocking the actual position of the switching device is adopted and displayed in the operation panel of the device i i NOTE When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire device or the switching device is in test mode these states are not sa...

Page 150: ... are for example Maintenance work System upgrades Testing the local protection functions The Device logoff functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the transmitter devices To do this the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for the multibay functions i i NOTE If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant you mu...

Page 151: ... after logoff the Device logged off _ 315 state is stored If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device you must log on the device again To log on the device you must use the same option used for logoff For example if you have logged off the device via binary inputs you must log it on again via the binary inputs This applies in similar manner if you have logged off ...

Page 152: ...re not at one of the ends in series connected topologies cannot be logged off Logoff via Binary Inputs The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs If you want to use push buttons switch them on as shown in the following figure Use the push button Key2 to log off the device use the push button Key1 log on the device again loextta logoff device 1 en_US Figure 3 90 ...

Page 153: ...eral Dev funct logoff off SPS I _ 319 General Device logoff SPC C _ 313 General Logged off via BI SPS O _ 314 General Logged off via control SPS O _ 315 General Device logged off SPS O 3 8 4 3 System Functions 3 8 Other Functions SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 153 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 154: ...on groups for example rated voltage and rated current or rated apparent power The setting values are thus related exclusively to the primary settings If other reference values are used then this is documented for the respective protection function in the application and setting notes If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views Recommendation fo...

Page 155: ... to 1 5 A scmodsek_1 1 en_US Figure 3 92 Protection Setting Display of the Active Setting Sheet When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left you get to the window for switching over to the setting view see the following figure Select the setting view you prefer scmodums_2 1 en_US Figure 3 93 Switchover to the Desired Setting View The following figures show the setting sequ...

Page 156: ... reference variables for the percent setting screfpro 280514_de 1 en_US Figure 3 95 Reference Data for Percentage Settings The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at 1500 A System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 156 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 ...

Page 157: ...ction Edit Mode Primary When switching over to the percent view the result should be the following value 1500 A 1000 A 100 150 System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 157 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 158: ...ion Edit Mode Percent When switching over to the secondary view the result should be the following value 1500 A 1000 A 1 A 1 5 A System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 158 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 159: ...mer ratio changes from 1000 A 1 A to 1000 A 5 A Change the secondary rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A Edit mode Secondary If you change the transformer data a window will appear see the following figure that will ask you for the action desired System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functi...

Page 160: ...ew For the new secondary transformer current 5 A the new secondary threshold value obtained is 7 5 A 1 5 A 5 7 5 A The primary and percent values remain unchanged The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 160 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G50...

Page 161: ...he Question Yes No Threshold value secondary active setting view 7 5 A 1 5 A Threshold value primary covered setting view 1500 A 300 A Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device The device is preset to the secondary value at the time of delivery Only secondary values can be set directly on the device If you change transformer data directly on the device it is not followed ...

Page 162: ...upervisory device function Accordingly the settings and indications of the settings group switching can be found in DIGSI 5 and at the on site operation panel of the device below the general device settings respectively If you want to switchover a settings group navigate to DIGSI 5 or proceed on the on site operation panel of the device as follows Via the project tree in DIGSI 5 Project Device Set...

Page 163: ...opy or compare settings groups with each other If you want to copy settings groups select a source and target parameter group in DIGSI 5 in the device settings and then start the copy process The device settings can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Project Device Settings Device settings If you want to compare settings groups it is possible to do so in all setting sheets for settings You...

Page 164: ...oups 1 to 8 1 _ 114 General Activat of settings group via control via binary input settings group 1 settings group 2 settings group 3 settings group 4 settings group 5 settings group 6 settings group 7 settings group 8 settings group 1 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 500 General SG choice bit 1 SPS I _ 501 General SG choice bit 2 SPS I _ 502 General SG choice bit 3 S...

Page 165: ... shows you the chapters containing the desired information You can find more about Chatter blocking in chapter 3 8 1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals Control in chapter 6 3 Control Functionality System Functions 3 10 Device Settings SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 165 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 166: ...uration for the trip command of the functions The trip command is maintained for the set duration Parameter Reserv time for com prot Voreinstellwert _ 163 Reserv time for com prot 120 s With the parameter Reserv time for com prot you define the maximum reservation time for the parameterization of the device via the communication protocol That means the maximum time that may elapse between the begi...

Page 167: ...ivate device test mode to inactive again removing the check mark Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Device _ 101 General Rated frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz _ 102 General Minimum operate time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 138 General Block moni toring dir off on off Setting change _ 163 General Reserv time for com prot 0 s to 65535 s 120 s Spontan indic _ 139 General Fault displa...

Page 168: ...lable Via the binary inputs general Device funct logoff on _ 507 or Dev funct logoff off _ 508 You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Information routing in the working area in the General block During the log off process the device checks whether all conditions for a logoff have been met If the condi tions for the log off have not ...

Page 169: ...nsmitter device even if the transmitter and or the receiver are switched off in the meantime Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination using Protection Communication If devices in a device combination communicate via the protection interface you can only log off a device under the following conditions Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interrupt...

Page 170: ...ou have logged off the device via binary inputs the indication _ 313 Logged off via BI is issued If you have logged off the device via on site operation via DIGSI 5 or via the protection interface the indica tion _ 314 Logged off via control is issued The indications are stored in the operational log Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 507 General Device funct logoff on ...

Page 171: ...switching are protected by other security prompts and confirmation IDs If changes are done via the integrated operation these confirmation IDs are queried on the on site operation panel The confirmation ID contains only numbers that must be entered at the on site operation panel or in DIGSI 5 The 3 level security concept consists of secure authentication the connection password and other confirma ...

Page 172: ...172 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 173: ...174 4 2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD85 175 4 3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD86 178 4 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 173 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 174: ...your specific application check adapt default settings delete add func tions You can find more detailed information in 2 2 Adjustment of Application Templates Functional Scope Check the routing of binary outputs in relation to fast and normal relays Check the logic block chart for the group warning indication The following describes the application templates for 6MD85 and 6MD86 devices i i NOTE Th...

Page 175: ...MD85 ANSI Function Abbr Points Template 1 Template 2 25 Synchrocheck synchronizing function 50 27 Undervoltage protection 3 phase V 5 27 Undervoltage protection 3 phase universal Vx Vx 5 32 37 Power protection active reactive power P Q 10 38 Temperature supervision θ 0 46 Negative sequence protection non directional I2 10 49 Thermal overload protection θ I2t 0 50 51 TD Overcurrent protection phase...

Page 176: ...t detection 0 External trip initiation 0 Control 0 Fault recording of analog and binary signals 0 Supervision 0 x x Protection interface serial 0 Circuit breaker 3a Circuit breaker control 3a 1 1 Circuit breaker status 3a Disconnector grounding conductor 3a 3 3 Disconnector grounding conductor status 3a Function points 0 52 a Points apply beginning with the 5th element b 3 Function points per type...

Page 177: ...ble busbar feeder with switchgear interlocking protection but also contains the CFC blocks for switching sequences Switching sequence for automatic busbar switchover triggered by function key Applications 4 2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 6MD85 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 177 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 178: ...nts of the application templates described below Table 4 2 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 6MD86 ANSI Function Abbr Points Template 1 Template 2 Template 3 25 Synchrocheck synchronizing function 0 x x x 27 Undervoltage protection 3 phase V 5 27 Undervoltage protection 3 phase universal Vx Vx 5 32 37 Power protection active reactive power P Q 10 38 Temperature supervision θ...

Page 179: ...c protection 0 x Signaling voltage supervision 0 x External synchronization 0 x External 1 of n check 0 CFC arithmetic 0 Switching sequence 0 x Inrush current detection 0 External trip initiation 0 Control 0 x x x Fault recording of analog and binary signals 0 Supervision and monitoring 0 x x x Protection interface serial 0 Circuit breaker 0 1 2 1 Circuit breaker control 0 1 Circuit breaker status...

Page 180: ...rcuit breaker layout bay 3 circuit breakers 18 disconnectors grounding conductors Synchrocheck for the 3 circuit breakers with dynamic measuring point switchover Logic block chart for dynamic synchronization voltage selection Application Template 6MD86 1 1 2 Circuit Breaker Layout Type 2 The 6MD86 1 1 2 circuit breaker layout type 2 application template is preconfigured for the following appli cat...

Page 181: ... 200 5 4 Function Group Type Voltage 3 Phase 206 5 5 Function Group Type Circuit Breaker 3 Pole 209 5 6 Function Group Type Circuit Breaker 1 3 Pole 227 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units 253 5 8 Process Monitor 292 5 9 Voltage Measuring Point Selection 300 5 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 181 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 182: ...em Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application Possible measuring points are Voltage 3 phase measuring point V 3 ph Current 3 phase measuring point I 3 ph Voltage 1 phase measuring point V 1 ph Current 1 phase measuring point I 1 ph The measuring points have interfaces to the function groups requiring voltage and or current measured values of the power system Applicat...

Page 183: ... the parameter Matching ratio Vph VN you set the deviation between the calculated zero sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measuring input The different transmission ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation see Figure 5 2 The Matching ratio Vph VN is equal to the ratio 3V0 sec VN sec with V0 sec Calculated zero sequence voltage VN sec Measured ...

Page 184: ... the result is VN sec 3 Vrated sec 3 Calculate the Matching ratio Vph VN parameter as follows fo_bsp1 2 en_US Set Matching ratio Vph VN 1 73 In example 1 Vrated sec the phase to ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken delta winding were identical If these voltages are different use the actual numerical values in the calculation EXAMPLE 2 Phase to ground voltage Vrated sec 100 V Brok...

Page 185: ... gnd volt VN The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3 phase voltage measuring point The parameter can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Settings Power system Measuring point V 3 phase You cannot change the connection type of the voltage transformer in the power system data You can change the connection type of the voltag...

Page 186: ...ints shall be considered Siemens recommends using the default setting Note If the parameter Tracking active the determined sampling frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling rates inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for deter mining the sampling frequency please select the setting value inactive Parameter Magnitude correction Def...

Page 187: ...tion active If the parameter Tracking active has been set the measuring point will be included when determining the sampling frequency If possible only the 3 phase measuring points shall be considered Siemens recommends using the default setting Note If the parameter Tracking active the determined sampling frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling rates inactive If ...

Page 188: ...ay be retained for power system protection applications Parameter Magnitude correction Default setting _ 3841 103 Magnitude correction 1 000 When using the Magnitude correction parameter you adjust the magnitude magnitude correction for the current input This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase selec tively The magnitude correction may be required for high...

Page 189: ... not assigned 3 ph to gnd volt VN 3 ph to gnd voltages 3 ph to ph volt VN 3 ph to ph voltages 2 ph to ph volt VN 2 ph to ph voltages 2 ph to gnd volt VN 2 ph to gnd voltages 3 ph to gnd volt VN _ 8911 106 VT 3 phase Inverted phases none AC BC AB none _ 8911 111 VT 3 phase Tracking inactive active active _ 8911 130 VT 3 phase Measuring point ID 0 to 100 0 Voltage transformers1 4 _ 3811 103 VT 1 Mag...

Page 190: ...rror A 0 5 to 50 0 5 0 _ 8881 109 CT 3 phase CT error B 0 5 to 50 0 15 0 CT IN _ 8881 104 CT 3 phase Rated primary current 1 0 A to 100000 0 A 1000 0 A _ 8881 105 CT 3 phase Rated secon dary current 1 A 5 A 1 A _ 8881 119 CT 3 phase Current range 1 6 x IR 8 x IR 20 x IR 100 x IR 100 x IR _ 8881 120 CT 3 phase Internal CT type CT protection CT measurement CT protection CT IN2 _ 8881 106 CT 3 phase ...

Page 191: ... CT 4 Magnitude correction 0 010 to 10 000 1 000 _ 3844 117 CT 4 Phase I A I B I C IN INsens Ix 50 frames s 60 frames s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 500 General Phs rotation reversal SPS I _ 2311 501 General Invert Phases SPS I General _ 2311 319 General Phase sequence ABC SPS O _ 2311 320 General Phase sequence ACB SPS O _ 2311 321 General Freq out of oper r...

Page 192: ...upv ph seq V Inactive SPS O _ 2581 52 Supv ph seq V Behavior ENS O _ 2581 53 Supv ph seq V Health ENS O _ 2581 71 Supv ph seq V Failure SPS O Supv sum V _ 2461 82 Supv sum V Block function SPS I _ 2461 54 Supv sum V Inactive SPS O _ 2461 52 Supv sum V Behavior ENS O _ 2461 53 Supv sum V Health ENS O _ 2461 71 Supv sum V Failure SPS O Definite T 1 _ 2641 500 VT miniatureCB Open SPS I General _ 8881...

Page 193: ...ic Struc ture of the Function You can find the function scope of the application templates for the various device types in the chapter 4 Applications Structure of the Function Group The function group always contains the following blocks Protected object equipment data FB General Operational measured values Process monitor Output logic of the function group Reset LED group These blocks are essenti...

Page 194: ... function group to the V 3ph measuring point is optional You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface You can find more information in chapter 5 9 Voltage Measuring Point Selection If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V 3ph measuring point double click in the DIGSI 5 project tree Name of the device on Measuring point routing Connec tion type 3 ...

Page 195: ...n chapter 3 1 10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group Process Monitor The process monitor is always present in the Voltage current 3 phase function group and cannot be removed The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage current 3 phase function group Current flow criterion Detection of an open activated protected object equipment based on the flow of leakage...

Page 196: ...erational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9 3 Operational Measured Values Output Logic The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail able in the function group separately in a pickup logic and a trip logic respectively The pickup and trip logic generate the overreaching indications group indications of the fun...

Page 197: ...ng value directly on the device then the IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty Parameter Rated voltage Default setting _ 9451 102 Rated voltage 400 00 kV With the Rated voltage parameter you can set the primary rated voltage of the protected object or equip ment The Rated voltage parameter is significant for protection functions as long as the current values are set in percen...

Page 198: ...ed on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed Addr Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting Network data _ 103 General rated apparent power 0 20 MVA to 5 000 00 MVA 692 82 MVA i i NOTE You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in chapter 5 8 Process Monitor Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Rated values _ 9451 101 General Rated cur...

Page 199: ...Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O Closure detec _ 1131 4681 500 Closure detec Disconnector open SPS I _ 1131 4681 300 Closure detec Closure SPS O Function Group Types 5 2 Function Group Type Voltage current 3 Phase SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 199 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 200: ...to be connected The other is optional This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree Function group connections To connect the interfaces set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix The function group has the following interfaces to the measuring points 1 phase current The 1 phase current measured values are provided via this interface You can only connect ...

Page 201: ...Voltage Measuring Point The zero sequence voltage calculated from the 3 phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is available via the voltage interface see figure below scVI1ph_V3ph 1 en_US Figure 5 10 Connecting Measuring Points 3 Phase Voltage and 1 Phase Current to the 1 Phase Voltage Current Function Group You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage current 1 phase functi...

Page 202: ...phase function group sc1stspc 190214 01 1 en_US Figure 5 11 Connecting Voltage Current 1 Phase Function Group with Circuit Breaker Function Group Fundamental Components The fundamental components are always present in the Voltage current 1 phase function group and cannot be deleted The following table shows the fundamental components of the Voltage current 1 phase function group Table 5 2 Fundamen...

Page 203: ...rent power in the General function block of the Voltage current 1 phase function group You can find the parameter Rated frequency in the General function block of the Device settings i i NOTE The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1 phase current are connected to the function group If the co...

Page 204: ... the phase to ground voltage Parameter P Q sign Default setting _ 9421 150 P Q sign not reversed The power values are set at the factory so that power in the direction of the protected object is considered positive You can also define the power output by the protected object as positive With the P Q sign parameter you can invert the signs of active and reactive power This inversion has no effect o...

Page 205: ...havior ENS O _ 9421 53 General Health ENS O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Reset LED Group _ 13381 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 13381 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O 5 3 6 Function Group Types 5 3 Function Group Type Voltage current 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 205 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition ...

Page 206: ...ee Function group connec tions To connect the interfaces set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix sc3span1 190214 01 1 en_US Figure 5 14 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3 Phase Function Group If you add functions to the Voltage 3 phase function group these are connected to the measuring point auto matically You can connect multiple measuring points with t...

Page 207: ... Phase to ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values 3 VAB VBC VCA Phase to phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values V0 Zero sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values 3 VNG Neutral point displacement voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values 3 f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency Application and Setting Notes i i NOTE Befo...

Page 208: ...t _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Reset LED FG _ 4741 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 4741 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O 5 4 5 Function Group Types 5 4 Function Group Type Voltage 3 Phase 208 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 209: ...for example the functional scope of the Circuit breaker function group scfgleis 200214 01 1 en_US Figure 5 16 Circuit Breaker Function Group Example of the Functional Scope The Circuit breaker function group includes 3 different types of circuit breakers Circuit breaker Circuit breaker control Circuit breaker status only The circuit breaker type can accept additional basic function blocks for prot...

Page 210: ...ker Circuit breaker position recognition for protection functions Detection of manual closure General settings The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit breaker function group The individual function blocks in the image are described in the following chapters dwfgstru 080812 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 17 Structure of the Circuit Breaker Function Group The Circuit breaker function group ...

Page 211: ...nction group via the interfaces of the Circuit breaker function group This data includes for example the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the direction of the Circuit breaker function group and for example the circuit breaker condition information in the direction of the protection function groups If an application template is used the function groups are connecte...

Page 212: ...ting value directly on the device then the IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty Parameter Current Threshold Circuit Breaker Open Default setting _ 2311 112 Current thresh CB open 0 10 A With the Current thresh CB open parameter you specify the threshold value below which the circuit breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open Set the Current thresh CB open para...

Page 213: ...O _ 4261 313 Circuit break Break current phs C MV O _ 4261 317 Circuit break Tripping current 3I0 IN MV O _ 4261 314 Circuit break Break voltage phs A MV O _ 4261 315 Circuit break Break voltage phs B MV O _ 4261 316 Circuit break Break voltage phs C MV O _ 4261 322 Circuit break CB open hours INS O _ 4261 323 Circuit break Operating hours INS O Trip Logic Function Description The Trip logic funct...

Page 214: ...options only differs in one situation of the circuit breaker state If the circuit breaker is in the opening state the trip command is reset in the case of the option with I whereas it is not reset yet in the case of the option with with I aux contact The opening state is detected if the auxil iary contacts still detect the circuit breaker as being closed and opening is detected via the decreasing ...

Page 215: ...c _ 103 Trip logic Reset of trip command with I with I aux contact with dropout with I Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Trip logic _ 300 Trip logic Trip indication ACT O Circuit Breaker Overview The Circuit breaker function block represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device The basic tasks of this function block are the operation of the circuit breaker and the acquis...

Page 216: ...period see also 5 5 6 1 Function Description Only in the event of protection tripping With the routing option Only saved in the event of tripping the signal remains pending until it is acknowledged manually This only applies for protection tripping Unlatched Only saved in the event of protec tion trip ping not when opened Close command This signal executes all closing operations The Output time pa...

Page 217: ...wing information when the open and closed positions are acquired see following table This information is further processed by the Circuit breaker position recognition and Control function blocks Information Type Description Off SPS Circuit breaker position is opened On SPS Circuit breaker position is closed Intermediate position SPS Circuit breaker position is in intermediate position Disturbed po...

Page 218: ...user may wish to actuate an alarm for example a horn when tripping circuit breaker tripping occurs This alarm should not to be issued if the circuit breaker is to be reclosed automatically after tripping or if it is to be closed or opened via the control The alarm is only to be issued in the event of final tripping Depending on how the alarm is generated for example triggered by a fleeting contact...

Page 219: ...ching cycles All tripping opening and closing operations are counted Number of closing operations by the automatic reclosing function Total of breaking currents The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control It is also possible to reset all values via the binary input signal Reset switch statist lo_statistics information circuit breaker 2 en_US Figure 5 24 Stat...

Page 220: ...pole tripping of the circuit breaker Routing for Analysis of the Circuit Breaker Switch Position For certain functions of the device it is useful to detect the circuit breaker switch position via its auxiliary contacts These data are for example Circuit breaker position recognition function block Circuit breaker failure protection function Control function block The operating principle of the auxi...

Page 221: ...too short there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit If this happens the device contacts will burn out Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position open or closed after a control operation Parameter Indicat of breaking values Default setting _ 105 Indicat of breaking values always With the Indicat of breaki...

Page 222: ...ircuit breaker fleeting contact on the circuit breaker to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is definitive see next figure for more details Likewise a tripping alarm should not be triggered for switching operations by the control For this the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device output signal Alarm suppression In the idle sta...

Page 223: ...O _ 312 Circuit break Break current phs B MV O _ 313 Circuit break Break current phs C MV O _ 317 Circuit break Break current 3I0 IN MV O _ 314 Circuit break Break voltage phs A MV O _ 315 Circuit break Break voltage phs B MV O _ 316 Circuit break Break voltage phs C MV O _ 322 Circuit break CB open hours INS O _ 323 Circuit break Operating hours INS O Circuit Breaker Position Recognition for Prot...

Page 224: ...in conditions are evaluated differently by certain functions Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when while a trip command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed the current is detected to have fallen below the threshold value because the current flow criterion takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact can open Detection Manual Closure for AREC and Proc...

Page 225: ...ternal control function of the device This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to inter locking Application and Setting Notes Input Signals Input Blocking of Manual Closure In practice the input signal Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit breaker closing coil see following figure losteuer 150113 01 tif 1 en_US Figu...

Page 226: ... dropout delay Default setting _ 102 CB open dropout delay 0 ms With the CB open dropout delay parameter you can maintain the effectiveness of internal indication CB open circuited for the set time If the input signal Input becomes active after external delayed manual closure the indication _ 300 Detected is output as long as the dropout delay is active Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options De...

Page 227: ... breaker function group scbicb1p 241013 1 en_US Figure 5 32 Circuit Breaker Function Group Example of the Functional Scope These functions are described in the chapters Protection and automation functions and Control functionali ties Structure of the Function Group Besides the user functions the Circuit breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen tial for general purpose...

Page 228: ...e this link is essential It may be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the func tion group depending on the nature of the user functions used Configuration is carried out using the Func tion group connections editor in DIGSI 5 For more information about this refer to chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device If a user function for example synchronization is used in the function ...

Page 229: ...assignments of the Protection function group or groups to the Circuit breaker function groups you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated Which protection functions activate the Automatic reclosing function Which protection functions activate the Circuit breaker fail...

Page 230: ...that the current measured when the circuit breaker pole is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value If parasitic currents for example due to induction are excluded with the line deactivated you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high degree of sensitivity to 0 05 A for example If no special requirements exist Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0 10 A for ...

Page 231: ...ole operate in the event of 3 phase short circuits The preconditions for 1 pole operate are The device is designed for 1 pole operate see Order reference The tripping protection function can generate 1 pole operate indications and is set accordingly 1 pole operate allowed parameter set to yes The circuit breaker function group allows 1 pole operate To do this set the 1 pole operate allowed paramet...

Page 232: ...unc tions 2 Phase Short Circuits For 2 pole faults you set the behavior with the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit 3 pole Tripping is executed in the event of 2 pole faults 1 pole leading phase 1 pole tripping takes place in the event of 2 pole faults without grounding The leading phase is tripped for more information see Table 5 6 In the event of a BC fault for example pole B is tripped 3 pole ...

Page 233: ...re 5 34 You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of trip command with dropout The trip command is reset if the function that initiated tripping terminates its operate indication This occurs typically with dropout Resetting the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the circuit breaker condition with I Function Group Types...

Page 234: ...Parameter 3 Pole Coupling Default setting _ 5341 102 3 pole coupling with trip Parameter Value Description with trip With this setting every multipole trip command results in 3 pole tripping If a 1 phase short circuit is present within the tripping zone and any other fault is present outside the zone 1 pole tripping is possible Even an additional fault during 1 pole tripping also results in 3 pole...

Page 235: ...to be executed in the event of this fault type select the 3 pole setting Parameter Reset of trip command Recommended setting value _ 5341 103 Reset of trip command with I Parameter Value Description with I With this setting the trip command is reset as soon as the current is removed provided the tripping function has dropped out The most important factor for recognition of the open circuit breaker...

Page 236: ... and Closing the Circuit Breaker The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of automatic reclosing or control operations Tripping is always the result of a protection function The operate indications of...

Page 237: ...applies for protection tripping Unlatched Only saved in the event of protection tripping not when opened Trip only pole A This signal only executes 1 pole tripping for phase A If 3 pole tripping occurs while a 1 pole trip signal is active the 1 pole signal is canceled The signal is active for as long as the trip command is active but at least for the duration of the output time Normal routing Trip...

Page 238: ...cuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information To determine the circuit breaker switch position the Circuit breaker function block provides position signals see next figure These signals are of the Double point indication DPC type A double point indication can be routed to 2 binary inputs so that the open and closed circuit breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired loerfass 091210...

Page 239: ...d On SPS Circuit breaker switch position is closed Intermediate position SPS Circuit breaker switch position is in intermediate position Disturbed position SPS Circuit breaker switch position is in disturbed position Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation Other input signals are Signal Type Description Acquisition blocking SPS This is used to activate acquisit...

Page 240: ...ion executes a closure The integrated control executes a closure or opening action External closing is detected via the Manual on function Further information about its use is included in the Application and Setting Notes lounterd 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 40 Definitive Tripping Circuit Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression Tripping and Opening Information When a trip or opening command is issue...

Page 241: ...Breaker Application and Setting Notes Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker Figure 5 43 shows the necessary routings The device can execute 1 pole and 3 pole tripping via the protection The device can execute 3 pole opening via the control The device can execute 3 pole closing via AREC or via the control loansteu 071210 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 43 Activation of the Circuit Breaker i i NOTE...

Page 242: ...acts is described in the individual functions Depending on the application Siemens recommends the following different interfaces for the auxiliary contacts The device performs protection and automatic reclosing functions without any control functionality For optimal performance of the protection and automatic reclosing functions the Pole closed informa tion should be acquired selectively via the a...

Page 243: ...S Figure 5 47 Routing for the Acquisition of Information that Circuit Breaker Is Open in 3 Poles Depending on the design of the circuit breaker other auxiliary contacts can be available in the system In this case the device allows all routing options and acquires the necessary information automatically Since all routing options are possible on the device there is no need for auxiliary contacts to ...

Page 244: ...ak voltage phs A Break voltage phs B Break voltage phs C The measured value Break current 3I0 IN is the neutral point current Depending on the connection type of the measuring point I 3ph that is connected to the Circuit breaker function group the neutral point current differs as follows Connection Type of the Measuring Point I 3ph Neutral Point Current 3 phase Calculated zero sequence current 3I0...

Page 245: ... _ 502 Circuit break Reset switch statist SPS I _ 504 Circuit break Reset AcqBlk Subst SPS I _ 503 Circuit break External health ENS I _ 53 Circuit break Health ENS O _ 58 Circuit break Position DPC C _ 300 Circuit break Trip open cmd SPS O _ 301 Circuit break Close command SPS O _ 302 Circuit break Command active SPS O _ 303 Circuit break Definitive trip SPS O _ 304 Circuit break Alarm suppressio...

Page 246: ...luates the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts lozust1p 170611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 49 Overview of the Circuit Breaker Position Recognition Function Based on the connection between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow the circuit breaker condition can assume the following conditions separately for each phase Circuit Breaker Condition Phase Segregated Description Open ...

Page 247: ...tection External Manual Closure An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal Input The input signal can also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit breaker closing coil For this reason detection is suppressed in the event of a close command by the AREC function Detection via the input signal Input is also blocked if the circuit breaker is close...

Page 248: ...from manual activation of the input signal the detection function is extended for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms Parameter CB open dropout delay Default setting _ 102 CB open dropout delay 0 ms With the CB open dropout delay parameter you can maintain the effectiveness of the internal indication CB open for the set time If the i...

Page 249: ... 3 pole 1 pole leading phase 1 pole lagging phase 3 pole _ 5341 102 Trip logic 3 pole coupling with pickup with trip with trip _ 5341 103 Trip logic Reset of trip command with I with I aux contact with dropout with I Circuit break _ 4261 101 Circuit break Output time 0 02 s to 1800 00 s 0 10 s _ 4261 105 Circuit break Indicat of breaking values with trip always always Manual close _ 6541 101 Manua...

Page 250: ...201 159 Control Ident sw auth 5 Freely editable text _ 4201 154 Control Multiple specific sw auth 0 1 false CB test _ 6151 101 CB test Dead time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s _ 6151 102 CB test Trip only 0 1 false _ 6151 103 CB test Consider current criterion 0 1 false _ 6151 104 CB test Current threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0...

Page 251: ... _ 4261 309 Circuit break ΣIB Brk BCR O _ 4261 310 Circuit break ΣIC Brk BCR O _ 4261 311 Circuit break Break current phs A MV O _ 4261 312 Circuit break Break current phs B MV O _ 4261 313 Circuit break Break current phs C MV O _ 4261 317 Circuit break Break current 3I0 IN MV O _ 4261 314 Circuit break Break voltage phs A MV O _ 4261 315 Circuit break Break voltage phs B MV O _ 4261 316 Circuit b...

Page 252: ...PS I _ 4231 502 Interlocking Enable opening fixed SPS I _ 4231 503 Interlocking Enable closing fixed SPS I _ 4231 53 Interlocking Health ENS O CB test _ 6151 53 CB test Health ENS O _ 6151 301 CB test Test execution ENS O _ 6151 302 CB test Trip command issued ENS O _ 6151 303 CB test Close command issued ENS O _ 6151 304 CB test Test canceled ENS O _ 6151 311 CB test 3 pole open close SPC C _ 615...

Page 253: ... Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI Structure of the Function Group If the device has a measuring transducer it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group If one or more RTD units are connected to the device you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether or RTD unit serial functions from the Global DIGSI library in order to map the RTD units The following figure shows the structure o...

Page 254: ...xternal RTD unit These measured tempera ture values are available for all protection function groups in which a temperature monitoring function works The RTD unit Ether function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer A maximum of 20 function instances can operate simultaneously The RTD unit serial function is set up structurally exactly in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether function Function ...

Page 255: ...h the 20 mA unit Structure of the Function The function 20 mA unit Ether can work only in the function group Analog units A maximum of 4 function instances can work simultaneously Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks The function 20 mA unit Ether contains input and output channels which can be configured independently of one another dwstrfn2 150113 01 tif 2 en_US Figure ...

Page 256: ...n and Setting Notes The 20 mA measurement unit 7XV5674 is supported Error Responses The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning state Table 5 8 Error Responses Error Description Status Health The function 20 mA unit Ether cannot establish a connection with a communication module Alarm The function 20 mA unit Ether sends TCP settings to...

Page 257: ...rk configuration You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts with other IP addresses in the network First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20 mA unit Then specify the IP address settings for the communication module to the same address Settings on the 20 mA Unit The 7XV5674 20 mA unitis set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter s Ethernet interface Set Modb...

Page 258: ... as a temperature or a pressure Therefore the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20 mA value If you do not activate the Range active setting no x in the check box the function operates over the range 0 mA to 20 mA If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the 20 mA unit the measured value is identified as invalid The...

Page 259: ...2 In this example the Range active setting is selected The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA the setting Lower limit is at 4 mA The setting Upper limit Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit Sensor is at 33 If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA the quality of the scaled measured value in this example is invalid Each 20 mA channel makes available the scaled measured val...

Page 260: ...a usable range of 20 mA to 20 mA If you activate the Range active setting then 4 additional settings Upper limit Upper limit Sensor Lower limit and Lower limit Sensor appear Parameter Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Sensor and Lower limit Sensor Default setting _ 13111 105 Upper limit 20 000 mA Default setting _ 13111 109 Upper limit Sensor 100 Default setting _ 13111 106 Lower limit 4 000 mA ...

Page 261: ... 1 Unit C F Ω Ω km Ω mi 1 s A As cos φ cycles dB F km F mi h Hz Hz s in J J Wh K l s m mi min p u Pa periods rad rad s s V V Hz VA VAh var varh Vs W W s Wh m _ 13111 108 Channel 1 Resolution 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 0 1 5 7 3 7 Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 261 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 262: ...A unit Transforms the measured 20 mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or gas pressure Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC GOOSE protocols and the device display Monitors communication with the 20 mA unit The function 20 mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20 mA Unit Ether The mode of operation is also identical The only differe...

Page 263: ...tting _ 13111 108 Resolution 0 1 The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution Parameter Range active Default setting _ 13111 107 Range active false If you do not activate the Range active setting no x in the check box the function operates over the range 0 mA to 20 mA The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA If you activate ...

Page 264: ...311 106 General Slave address 1 to 247 1 Channel 1 _ 13111 103 Channel 1 Unit C F Ω Ω km Ω mi 1 s A As cos φ cycles dB F km F mi h Hz Hz s in J J Wh K l s m mi min p u Pa periods rad rad s s V V Hz VA VAh var varh Vs W W s Wh m 5 7 4 3 Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units 264 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 265: ...Health ENS O _ 2311 56 General Failure SPS O Channel 1 _ 13111 53 Channel 1 Health ENS O _ 13111 71 Channel 1 Failure SPS O _ 13111 301 Channel 1 20 mA output scale MV O _ 13111 302 Channel 1 20 mA output raw MV O Communication with 20 mA Unit Integration of a Serial 20 mA Unit Connection of the Communication Lines Figure 5 61 shows how to connect the 20 mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device Note that ...

Page 266: ... 5 63 Selecting the SUP Protocol Communication Settings Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels For this use the default settings specified by the 20 mA unit Normally you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings of the 20 mA unit Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same The settings of the Non flickering light on ...

Page 267: ...ion of the Function 20 mA Unit Serial 1 Now set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs In addition set the slave address of the 20 mA unit This address must be set with the same value in the 20 mA unit refer to the following figure For the first use of the 20 mA unit the following device configuration must be set on the 20 mA unit Bus protocol mod Device address 1 Baud rate 9600 Parit...

Page 268: ...ice configura tion Figure 5 67 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202 Alterna tively you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J scautcp1 220114 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 67 Inserting an Ethernet Module Communication Settings Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module 5 7 5 2 Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog U...

Page 269: ...0114 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 69 Selection of the Protocol With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20 mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function group and the 20 mA unit Ether function to your device configuration refer to the following figure Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 269 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition...

Page 270: ...ss voltage values DC 10 V to 10 V as well as current values DC 20 mA to 20 mA The function MT fast input Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz for all other SIPROTEC 5 devices The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the fault recorder function Calculated measured values from the sampled values These measured values hav...

Page 271: ...ion Description Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function it will be visible in the project tree in the function group Analog units You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder If you open the subdirectory MT fast input you reach the setting sheet for the respective input for more details see Application and Setting Notes The hardware is designed in such...

Page 272: ...been wired correctly see Hardware manual Input and Output Module IO212 Parameter Unit Default setting _ 103 Unit A With the parameter Unit you set the physical unit of measurement of the measured values The possible setting values are listed in the settings table Parameter Measuring window Default setting _ 142 Measuring window 10 ms With the parameter Measuring window you set the measuring window...

Page 273: ...ansducer Parameter Upper limit Upper limit Sensor Lower limit and Lower limit Sensor With the following parameters you set the scaling of the measuring variables By that you can scale in an application specific way Default setting Upper limit 20 00 mA Default setting Upper limit Sensor 1 00 Default setting Lower limit 20 00 mA Default setting Lower limit Sensor 1 00 With these setting parameters y...

Page 274: ...corresponds to 200 C and the lower value to 100 C This results in the following characteristic In accordance with the set characteristic curve the func tion calculates the sensor value from the measured current The coefficients of the linear equation gradient and foot point are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined A supplied current of 9 333 mA corresponds to a te...

Page 275: ...ts are at approx 20 mA and 20 mA or 10 V and 10 V Setting Example 2 For special applications the transmitter sends a maximum of 12 V This voltage shall be issued accordingly as sensor voltage Set the parameters as follows Upper limit 10 00 V Upper limit Sensor 10 00 V Lower limit 10 00 V Lower limit Sensor 10 00 V With this setting a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12 V measured value see following ...

Page 276: ... Greater than 10 V Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting MT fast _ 101 MT in TD input signal type Voltage input Current input Current input 5 7 6 5 Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units 276 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 277: ...0 ms 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms 100 ms 10 ms _ 107 MT in Range active 0 1 false _ 104 MT in Conversion factor 1000000 00 to 1000000 00 1 00 _ 105 MT in Upper limit 20 00 m Ato 20 00 mA 5 00 mA _ 109 MT in Upper limit Sensor 1000000 00 to 1000000 00 1 00 _ 106 MT in Lower limit 20 00 m Ato 20 00 mA 4 00 mA Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller...

Page 278: ... RTD unit Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function Monitors communication with the RTD unit Structure of the Function The RTD unit Ether function can only work in the Analog units function group A maximum of 20 function instances can work simultaneously Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks dwstrfnc 291112 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 77 Structu...

Page 279: ...100 Mbit communication module is therefore not possible For this reason you must connect the RTD box to the communication module via a 10 100 MBit s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the transmis sion rates and adapts them accordingly Further information can be found in the Application and setting notes see chapter 5 7 7 4 Application and Setting Notes Error Responses The following...

Page 280: ...s in the network Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit Then specify the IP address parameter for the communication module to the same address Settings on the RTD Unit The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its Ethernet interface Set the connection type of the sensors 3 wire connection or resistance value fo...

Page 281: ...can be monitored by the Temperature supervision function Error Responses If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect the quality attribute of the output measured temperature value is set to invalid The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with the following table Table 5 11 Error response Error Description Health Status Error Status Sensor or line short circu...

Page 282: ...Display Between C and F The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors as the setting possibilities of the 12 sensors do not differ Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 103 General Port port E port F port J port N port P port J Sensor 1 _ 11611 102 Sensor 1 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Information List No Information Data ...

Page 283: ...Parameter Channel number Default setting _ 2311 105 Channel number 1 A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels With the Channel number settings you set the channel number 1 or 2 through which the RTD unit is connected to the device The communication module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers Parameter Slave address Default setting _ 2311 106 Slave address 1 Use the Slave add...

Page 284: ... 4 _ 11614 102 Sensor 4 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 5 _ 11615 102 Sensor 5 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 6 _ 11616 102 Sensor 6 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 7 _ 11617 102 Sensor 7 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 8 _ 11618 102 Sensor 8 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 9 _ 11619 102 Sensor 9 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 ...

Page 285: ...lth ENS O _ 11613 60 Sensor 3 Failure SPS O _ 11613 80 Sensor 3 TmpOut MV O Sensor 4 _ 11614 52 Sensor 4 Health ENS O _ 11614 60 Sensor 4 Failure SPS O _ 11614 80 Sensor 4 TmpOut MV O Sensor 5 _ 11615 52 Sensor 5 Health ENS O _ 11615 60 Sensor 5 Failure SPS O _ 11615 80 Sensor 5 TmpOut MV O Sensor 6 _ 11616 52 Sensor 6 Health ENS O _ 11616 60 Sensor 6 Failure SPS O _ 11616 80 Sensor 6 TmpOut MV O ...

Page 286: ... Unit Ziehl TR1200 Connection of the Communication Lines Figure 5 81 shows how you connect the RTD box to the SIPROTEC 5 device Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug is connected to RTD B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD A dwverbau 201112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 81 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device Adding a USART Module Add a USART AB 1EL or a USART AC 2EL USART module in DIGSI to the de...

Page 287: ... the default settings specified by the RTD box Normally you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings of the RTD box Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same The settings of the Non flickering light on off is not relevant for the RS485 interface i i NOTE The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard fo...

Page 288: ...85 Analog Unit Instance Now set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs In addition set the slave address of the RTD box This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box refer to the following figure The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first time Bus protocol mod Device address 1 Baud rate 9600 Parity no Fun...

Page 289: ...he device configu ration Figure 5 87 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202 Alter natively you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J scautcp1 220114 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 87 Inserting an Ethernet Module Communication Settings Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module 5 7 9 2 Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type An...

Page 290: ...01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 89 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation base module With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function group and the RTD unit Ether function to your device configuration refer to the following figure Function Group Types 5 7 Function Group Type Analog Units 290 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015...

Page 291: ...inally load the configuration in the device Temperature Simulation without Sensors Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit Using this resistor simulate a constant tempera ture The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω If you want to simulate a changeable temperature connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead of a fixed resistor 5 7 9 3 Function Group Types...

Page 292: ...er with the following function blocks Cold load pickup detection optional Current flow criterion Circuit breaker condition Closure detection dwpro3pt 061212 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 92 Structure Embedding of the Function You can activate the cold load pickup detection as needed All other stages of the process monitor run perma nently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI The following fi...

Page 293: ...tion Process Monitor Current Flow Criterion loproikr 011112 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 94 Logic Diagram of the Current Flow Criterion Function Block 5 8 3 Function Group Types 5 8 Process Monitor SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 293 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 294: ...on and also for the process monitor in the protection function group If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several FG circuit breakers the Current thresh CB open parameter is present in each FG circuit breaker The smallest setting value of the parameter Current thresh CB open is used Application and Setting Notes Current Flow Criterion Parameter Current thr...

Page 295: ... this case the Circuit breaker position recognition for the protected object function block connects the individual CB states The connection provides the internal CB pos recogn prot obj signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions for example Trip in the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method within the same function group If one of th...

Page 296: ...nction block Manual close the indication _ 4681 300 ClosureClosure is active Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Closure detec _ 4681 500 Closure detec Disconnector open SPS I _ 4681 300 Closure detec Closure SPS O 5 8 8 Function Group Types 5 8 Process Monitor 296 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 297: ...hreshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve If the Cold load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min CB open time parameter has expired the indication Activate cold load is generated With the Activate cold load indication you can activate a parameter set of the Cold load pickup func tion Via the binary input si...

Page 298: ... if one of the following conditions is met Analysis of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open condition in at least one phase The current flow criterion detects a clearing open condition Parameter Dropout threshold current Default setting _ 102 Dropout threshold current 1 00 A With the Dropout threshold current parameter you set the threshold at which the output signal Cold ...

Page 299: ...5 000 A _ 103 Cold load PU Dropout delay curr crit 1sto600 s 600s _ 104 Cold load PU Dropout delay CB closed 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s _ 105 Cold load PU Min CB open time 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Cold load PU _ 81 Cold load PU Block stage SPS I _ 500 Cold load PU Block fast dropout SPS I _ 501 Cold load PU Activate cold load SPS I _ 54 Cold load PU Ina...

Page 300: ...ps of the protected objects Function Description The Voltage measuring point selection function block realizes the selection of voltage measuring points by a logic block chart The logic block chart controls the input MP ID selection depending on the switch posi tions of disconnectors Example Figure 5 99 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank in...

Page 301: ... implementation is based on the example given in Figure 5 99 If the Disconnector 1 QB1 is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 QB2 is the value 2 is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input MP ID selection Then the Meas point V 3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage Similarly the Meas point V 3ph with ID 3 is selected as the reference voltage if...

Page 302: ... is set to invalid The indication Health is set to Alarm The indication Selection invalid becomes true Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V MP selection _ 501 V MP selection MP ID selection INS I _ 53 V MP selection Health ENS O _ 301 V MP selection Selection invalid SPS O 5 9 4 Function Group Types 5 9 Voltage Measuring Point Selection 302 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller ...

Page 303: ...lity 335 6 4 Synchronization Function 360 6 5 Switching Sequences 425 6 6 User Defined Function Block Control 432 6 7 CFC Chart Settings 435 6 8 Transformer Tap Changers 437 6 9 Voltage Controller 450 6 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 303 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 304: ...for the control functions other logs are also used Concept of Controllables The concept of so called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850 Controllables are objects that can be controlled such as a switch with feedback The model of a transformer tap changer for example contains controllables The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type for ex...

Page 305: ...ected with 2 binary inputs double point indication In addition signals are available that display the current state of the switch not selected off on intermediate position disturbed position These signals can be queried in CFC for example in order to build interlocking conditions Control Models You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model Control Functions 6 1...

Page 306: ...odels dwsteuer 190912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 1 Command Sources Command Types and Control Models The figure shows the control models right with the respective control mechanisms center The standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring SBO w enh security This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices 15...

Page 307: ...The Circuit breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control Function block Circuit breaker Function block Control Function block Interlocking This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR CSWI and CILO in IEC 61850 In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices additional functions can be contained in the circuit breaker switch...

Page 308: ...aker On or Off together The Synchronization function can also be added 3 pole circuit breaker This switching device contains additional base function blocks for protection functions for example trip logic Manual close circuit breaker test 1 pole circuit breaker This switching device is intended for 1 pole tripping via the protection functions and contains the same base function blocks for protecti...

Page 309: ...tes the releases for switchgear interlocking protection The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 6 2 2 2 Application and Setting Notes Additional Setting Options of the Circuit Breaker Switching Element The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot ...

Page 310: ...taneous chng yes no When activated only the sponta neous change to the intermediate position is suppressed by the dura tion of the software filtering time Position of the Control function block16 Table 6 3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit Breaker Function Block Chatter Blocking Properties Function To Be Found in Chatter blocking yes no Switching chatter blocking on off P...

Page 311: ...er should signal that it is not ready for an Off On Off cycle Table 6 5 Inputs of the Circuit Breaker Function Block Signal Name Description Type Default Value if Signal Quality invalid Ready The signal Ready indicates that the OFF ON OFF cycle is possible with the circuit breaker This signal is used for the AREC standby status SPS Going Acquisition blocking The binary input activates acquisition ...

Page 312: ...e hours the circuit breaker is open INS Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is greater than the Current thresh CB open parameter INS Control It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command source and the circuit breaker Using the control settings you specify how the commands are to be proce...

Page 313: ...t indi cation of the Circuit breaker function block and the command is issued Controllable DPC Unchanged Unchanged In the information routing of DIGSI 5 you may select a function key as a possible command source In addi tion it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC The logging is routed here Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker For each switching device you can establish the n...

Page 314: ...he position OFF if there is no voltage at the routed binary input L Click the right mouse button and enter OL GH The switching device feedback is in the position ON if there is voltage at the routed binary input H Click the right mouse button and enter CH CL The switching device feedback is in the position ON if there is no voltage at the routed binary input H Click the right mouse button and ente...

Page 315: ...ng in DIGSI You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired They need not necessarily be next to one another The letter U represents an unlatched command Alternatively TL latched tripping can be selected Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 315 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 316: ...tif 1 en_US Figure 6 10 1 5 Pole Triggering scrang1pLS15p 1 en_US Figure 6 11 1 5 Pole Triggering Routing in DIGSI Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices 316 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 317: ...isition of the individual poles of a circuit breaker It is intended for common use by 1 pole working protection and control functions i i NOTE The wiring of the Circuit breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per device The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay...

Page 318: ...le Triggering For the circuit breaker with 1 pole triggering triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip command and via a 4th relay for the close command see next figure dw1panls 020211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 15 1 Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices 318 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 319: ...and trip command are set to 3 pole This routing is also used by protection functions that trip 3 poles The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases Example Trip Command during Transition from 1 Pole to 3 Pole During a transition from 1 pole to 3 pole tripping Trip only pole A remains active To inform for example an external AREC whether it is a 1 pole or 3 pole trip you can use the ...

Page 320: ...y inputs for feedback of the switch position is done as shown in the previous figure also see Chapter 5 6 5 3 Acquisition of Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices 320 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 321: ...101 General Rated normal current 0 20 A to 100000 00 A 1000 00 A _ 2311 102 General Rated voltage 0 20 kV to 1200 00 kV 400 00 kV Breaker settings _ 2311 112 General Current thresh CB open 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 100 A 5 A 1...

Page 322: ... 4201 101 Control Control model status only direct w normal secur SBO w normal secur direct w enh security SBO w enh security SBO w enh security _ 4201 102 Control SBO time out 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 30 00 s _ 4201 103 Control Feedback monitoring time 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 1 00 s _ 4201 104 Control Check switching authority no yes advanced yes _ 4201 105 Control Check if pos is reached no yes yes _ 420...

Page 323: ... Information Data Class Type Type Trip logic _ 5341 300 Trip logic Trip indication ACT O Circuit break _ 4261 500 Circuit break Ready SPS I _ 4261 501 Circuit break Acquisition blocking SPS I _ 4261 502 Circuit break Reset switch statist SPS I _ 4261 504 Circuit break Reset AcqBlk Subst SPS I _ 4261 503 Circuit break External health ENS I _ 4261 53 Circuit break Health ENS O _ 4261 58 Circuit brea...

Page 324: ...t SPS I _ 6541 300 Manual close Detected SPS O Reset LED Group _ 13381 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 13381 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O Control _ 4201 503 Control Sw authority local SPS I _ 4201 504 Control Sw authority remote SPS I _ 4201 505 Control Sw mode interlocked SPS I _ 4201 506 Control Sw mode non interl SPS I _ 4201 53 Control Health ENS O _ 4201 58 Control Cmd ...

Page 325: ...ce Like the circuit breaker the Disconnector switching device contains the following 3 function blocks Function block Disconnector Function block Control Function block Interlocking This corresponds to the logical nodes XSWI CSWI and CILO in IEC 61850 i i NOTE In contrast to the Circuit breaker switching device the Disconnector switching device cannot contain any additional functions because prote...

Page 326: ...sconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants Disconnector with 3 pole connection The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously Disconnector without triggering only status detection no control This variant is rarely encountered It is encountered with grounding switches that frequently cannot be controlled but only provide the...

Page 327: ...of Disconnector Switching Element The settings of the disconnector are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance Additional disconnector settings that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks and are identical to the circuit breaker settings are available Table 6 11 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function Block of t...

Page 328: ...rollable Position in the Disconnector Function Block Chatter Blocking Characteristics Function To Be Found in Chatter blocking yes no Switching chatter blocking on off Position of the Disconnector 1 function block 1 First click Position and then the Details key in the Properties window below Table 6 13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with effect on the Disconnector Characteristics Funct...

Page 329: ...is not yet attained although feedback has already been received the output time is extended by the Seal in time The Seal in time is relevant for equipment that sends feedback before the switching operation is completely performed The Seal in time is only considered for control models with feedback moni toring 0 00 s 0 s to 60 s _ 5401 103 Switching device type The Switching device type specifies t...

Page 330: ...S Unchanged Reset switch statist The binary input sets the operation counter for the switch to the value 0 SPS Unchanged Position The binary input Position can be used to read the disconnector position with double point indication DPC Unchanged If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality invalid then the standby status Health of the Disconnector function block is set to Warning T...

Page 331: ...ameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values _ 4201 101 Control model SBO w enh security20 direct w normal secur SBO w normal secur direct w enh security SBO w enh security _ 4201 102 SBO time out 30 00 s _ 4201 103 Feedback monitoring time 10 00 s _ 4201 104 Check switching authority yes no yes advanced _ 4201 105 Check if pos is reached yes no yes _ 4201 106 Check double activat blk yes no ...

Page 332: ...ontacts for On and Off as desired They need not necessarily be next to one another 1 5 Pole Triggering dw5polig 020211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 22 1 5 Pole Triggering Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices 332 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 333: ...5 Pole Triggering Routing in DIGSI 2 Pole Triggering dw2polan 020211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 24 2 Pole Triggering Control Functions 6 2 Switching Devices SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 333 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 334: ...nector grounding switch fast grounding switch disconnector Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Disconnector _ 5401 500 Disconnector Acquisition blocking SPS I _ 5401 501 Disconnector Reset switch statist SPS I _ 5401 53 Disconnector Health ENS O _ 5401 58 Disconnector Position DPC C _ 5401 300 Disconnector Open command SPS O _ 5401 301 Disconnector Close command SPS O _ 5401 302 D...

Page 335: ... settings The confirmation ID is requested before device parameters can be changed Operation function buttons Process data access via function buttons Access to process data is possible with the help of push buttons and function buttons The confirma tion ID of Set operation is requested Control process General release for control of switching devices The confirmation ID is usually not needed for b...

Page 336: ...C is checked before the command is output You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 interlocking off normal For devices without a key switch you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display after entering a confirmation ID You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources DIGSI station or remote DANGER If the switching mode no...

Page 337: ...n the device for command output no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be executed Station This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block A switching command from the station level cause of error source Station or Automatic station is accepted if the switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switchi...

Page 338: ...and the switching authority In the case of switching commands from Remote the information on whether a locked or non interlocked switching should take place is also sent For this reason the position of the key switch is irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases The information in the table assumes that in the case of remote switching commands or those from the station the switching mode is ...

Page 339: ...ink the input signals and in this way establish the output signals see Figure 6 29 and Figure 6 30 dwhoheit 260511 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 29 Establishing Switching Authority dwmodsch 020513 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 30 Establishing Switching Mode In the case of both functions the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch This allows external inputs to also set the switching authority or s...

Page 340: ...c Switching Authority Page 341 By default these are not used scakthoh 161014 1 en_US Figure 6 31 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching Authority Levels Table 6 19 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching Authority Levels Are Enabled with without Activation of the Station Switching Authority Release Several Switching Authority Levels Switching A...

Page 341: ...s it possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level Switching authority can be routed to or revoked from different control centers that can for example belong to different companies Thus precisely one of these command sources can switch at a certain time This function is based on extending the switching authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source field ...

Page 342: ...ed Table 6 21 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw auth valid for and the Level of the Command Source Field Originator orCat of the Switching Command Command Source Specific sw auth valid for station station remote remote Local local automatic No check No check No check Station station automatic Check Check No check Remote remote auto matic No check Check Check DI...

Page 343: ... how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating the command sources of Remote or Station If this parameter is activated all parameterized command sources get permissible automatically see last row in the table and they cannot be deactivated via the controllable Enable sw auth 1 to Enable sw auth 5 Otherwise the enabled command source with the lowest number has always t...

Page 344: ...al switching modes for single switching devices Therefore individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta neously This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks Circuit breaker function group Disconnector function group Transformer tap changer function group Switching sequence function block This allows to select individual s...

Page 345: ...e sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device 1 en_US Figure 6 35 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device sc_switching auth sw mode changeable 1 en_US Figure 6 36 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching mode for th...

Page 346: ...ity Modifiable for each Switching Device Switching Direction Set Actual With this check you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved For instance before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker its current position is determined If this circuit breaker is already in the Off position no command is issued This is logged accordingly Switchgear Interlocking P...

Page 347: ...hgear interlocking checks take place if no CFC charts have been prepared scverrie 260912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 39 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking EXAMPLE For interlocking For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 see the figure below it is necessary to check whether the disconnectors QB1 QB2 and QB9 are in the defined position that is either On or Off Open...

Page 348: ...igure scverpla 270511 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 41 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off the exclusive OR gate XOR is not necessary for interlocking A simple OR suffices Control Functions 6 3 Control Functionality 348 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 349: ...at the end If the 2 busbars in bay E01 are connected that is if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay E01 are closed the circuit breaker QA in bay E02 is not allowed to be switched off Accordingly bay E01 in the CFC of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and QB2 and using IEC 61850 GOOSE transmits it to bay E02 in the device You must then ...

Page 350: ...switching device function groups see figure below scnotselected 090315_de 1 en_US Figure 6 45 Signal Not selected in the Circuit Breaker Function Block The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used to generate the release signal for example Release on External 1 of N Check Cross Bay Double Activation Blocking The function block Ext 1...

Page 351: ...er bay the release is issued Only when the release was issued via the input Release active is the allocation Control model SBO w enh security or the switching command Control model direct w enh security executed and confirmed The central bay controller is parameterized to reject a 2nd switching request dw_block ext setzen 1 en_US Figure 6 47 Setting the Blocking Once the switch position has been r...

Page 352: ...switching device is released for switching operation As long as this input is set this switching device is blocked for addi tional switching opera tions true false Blocking by Protection Function Default setting _ 107 Check blk by protection yes In devices with protection and control functions Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be issued while protection functions have picked up Con...

Page 353: ...owing indications if present in your interlocking conditions Group indication Pickup Function group VI 3 phase VI 1 phase or V 3 phase Circuit breaker failure protection Pickup Circuit breaker failure protection Command Logging All commands in the sequence are logged The command log contains Date and time Name of the switching device or function group Reason for the transmission SEL Selected OPR O...

Page 354: ... Figure 6 49 Positive Case Display 1 scbbcon2 270313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 50 Positive Case Display 2 Control Functions 6 3 Control Functionality 354 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 355: ...6 51 Positive Case Display 3 scbbcon4 270313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 52 Positive Case with Command Cancellation Control Functions 6 3 Control Functionality SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 355 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 356: ...d by Switchgear Interlocking scbbcon7 270313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 54 Negative Case Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time Display 1 Control Functions 6 3 Control Functionality 356 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 357: ... Feedback Supervision Time Display 2 scbbcon9 270313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 56 Negative Case Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time Display 3 Control Functions 6 3 Control Functionality SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 357 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 358: ...e Spontaneous change SPN Actual value Application Notes and Setting Notes for the External 1 of n Check Function Block Parameter Feedba mon time release Default setting _ 101 Feedba mon time release 5 00 s With the parameter Feedba mon time release you specify the time within which the release request must be confirmed via the input Release active Parameter Feedba mon time reset Default setting _ ...

Page 359: ... time 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 1 00 s _ 104 Control Check switching authority no yes yes _ 105 Control Check if pos is reached no yes yes _ 106 Control Check double activat blk no yes yes _ 107 Control Check blk by protection no yes yes Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Control _ 53 Control Health ENS O _ 58 Control Cmd with feedback DPC C 6 3 4 6 3 5 Control Functions 6 3 Control Fu...

Page 360: ...g to dead line busbar Structure of the Function The Synchronization function is used in the Circuit breaker function group The following stage types can be used within the function Synchrocheck stage Synchronous asynchronous stage The Synchrocheck and Synchronous Asynchronous Sychr Asycr stage types are preconfigured at the factory In addition the stage type Extended delta f options are available ...

Page 361: ... breaker function group can be configured see chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary system Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1 phase and a 3 phase meas uring point Figure 6 59 and Figure 6 61 The voltage connected to the 1 phase measuring point is...

Page 362: ...ar Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs dwsyns02 210912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 60 Synchronization of Line and Busbar Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs Control Functions 6 4 Synchronization Function 362 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 363: ...g Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs dwsyndyn 221211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 62 Synchronization with Dynamic Measuring Point Toggling at 1 5 Circuit Breaker Usage Control Functions 6 4 Synchronization Function SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 363 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 364: ...imum of 180o In the case of a negative value α2 lags by a maximum of 180o Figure 6 63 shows the circumstances The phase angle α1 was added to the zero axis as a reference system If asynchronous systems are present and the frequency f2 is greater than f1 the angle dα then changes from the negative value to 0 and then to the positive value As shown in Figure 6 63 the direction of rotation is counter...

Page 365: ...apter Supervision description in this chapter Functional sequence for issuing the closing release see chapter 6 4 6 Sequence of Functions losyn001 100611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 64 Overview of the Stage Logic Stage Control The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage see Figure 6 64 6 4 4 6 4 4 1 Control Functions 6 4 Synchronization Function SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller ...

Page 366: ...e synchronization stage via the binary signal Block stage A started process is completed and the entire stage reset after blocking The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching procedure The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions The measured values are still calculated and displayed Operating Range losyn002 160311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 65 Logic of the Operat...

Page 367: ...ages The function measured values are determined and displayed as soon as the device is functional The difference values are calculated as soon as the stage is activated Table 6 24 Protection Specific Values of the Synchronization Values Primary Secon dary Referenced to V1 Reference voltage V1 kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values V2 Voltage to be synchronized V2 kV V Rated operating ...

Page 368: ... the transformer vector group via the Angle adjust transform parameter The parameter is defined as Δα α2 α1 To calculate the Delta parameters the voltage of side 2 is converted to the voltage of side 1 using to the settings of both parameters In the Application and Setting Notes several examples are provided for using both parameters Different Connection Types on Both Sides If both of the measurin...

Page 369: ...nection of the measuring points to the interface of the function groups refer to chapter 6 4 3 Connection and Definition The measuring point connected to the interface Voltage is the reference side 1 with the reference voltage V1 The measuring point connected to the interface Sync voltage is the side 2 with V2 The definition of the Delta parameters that can be derived from this is also described i...

Page 370: ...fining the time limitation This must be defined specifically for each system If 0 or 0 01 s is set then all conditions are checked once at the starting time point Thereafter the process is stopped immediately Parameter Voltage adjustment Default setting _ 5071 126 Voltage adjustment 1 00 The parameter can be used for correction of amplitude errors for example due to indirect measurement for exampl...

Page 371: ...t of 360o 5 30o 210o 2 Correction of phase angle errors You can correct a phase angle error between the voltage transformers in increments Ascertain a possible correction value during commissioning Parameter CB make time Default setting _ 5041 113 CB make time 0 06 s If you are to interconnect under asynchronous system conditions with the device as well the closing time of the circuit breaker must...

Page 372: ...ynamic Measuring Point Switching Dynamic measuring point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro check function to various measuring points In this way for example it is possible to use the correct voltage on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices If more than 1 measuring point is connected to V sync1 or V sync2 you must create the V sync se...

Page 373: ...nd QA3 the busbar voltage Vsync1 is available for one side and 3 voltages Vsync2 are available for the other side Connecting Measuring Points to Circuit Breaker Function Group The following figure shows the connection of the Circuit breaker function group with several measuring points in DIGSI The ID of each measuring point appears in parentheses after the name scdynms2 211212 01 tif 1 en_US Figur...

Page 374: ...faces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit breaker function group the V sync select function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit breaker function group A CFC logic see following example has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function scdynmsx 160212 01 tif 1 en_US Figur...

Page 375: ...ure After starting the parameterized closing conditions are checked depending on the operating mode selected see Chapter 6 4 8 1 Description to 6 4 12 Direct Close Command Every condition fulfilled is explicitly indi cated here Conditions not fulfilled are also indicated If all conditions are fulfilled the synchronization stage sets the indication All sync conditio OK The indication is active unti...

Page 376: ...al controller these functions also terminate the synchronization process upon closure The process is terminated via the corresponding binary signals in case of external starting If the supervision time Max durat sync process parameter has expired the process is also completed and the indication Max time exceeded is issued A renewed synchronization is only possible if the stage is restarted Blockin...

Page 377: ...rence OK If a condition is not fulfilled detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica tions If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits for example the indication V dif too large V2 V1 is issued The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be increased for a successful synchronization With the Expanded delta f options ...

Page 378: ...ues are selected in the default setting Depending on the system the settings must be checked and adjusted if necessary Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 5071 1 Synchrocheck 1 Mode off on test off _ 5071 101 Synchrocheck 1 Min operating limit Vmin 0 300 V to 340 000 V 90 000 V _ 5071 102 Synchrocheck 1 Max operat limit Vmax 0 300 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 5071 110...

Page 379: ...r cls cmd SPS I _ 5071 501 Synchrocheck 1 Block close command SPS I _ 5071 54 Synchrocheck 1 Inactive SPS O _ 5071 52 Synchrocheck 1 Behavior ENS O _ 5071 53 Synchrocheck 1 Health ENS O _ 5071 328 Synchrocheck 1 In progress SPS O _ 5071 324 Synchrocheck 1 Release close cmd SPS O _ 5071 305 Synchrocheck 1 All sync conditio OK SPS O _ 5071 325 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage difference OK SPS O _ 5071 326 Sy...

Page 380: ...shold ASYN SYN parameter asynchronous systems are to be assumed This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems for example Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions Both operating modes can be switched on and off separately parameter Sync operating mode and Async operating mode The following combinations result from this Sync operating mode Async operating mode...

Page 381: ...lled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle difference OK If a condition is not fulfilled detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica tions If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits for example the indication V dif too large V2 V1 is issued The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 ...

Page 382: ...10211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 73 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions Control Functions 6 4 Synchronization Function 382 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 383: ... ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker ΔV 0 Δα 0 Ranges in the Voltage Frequency Diagram V f Diagram Figure 6 75 shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V f diagram The frequency range is very narrow owing to the functional principle in...

Page 384: ...e parameters The operating modes are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons The following combination options are possible Sync operating mode Async operating mode Description on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold value set f threshold ASYN SYN the oper ating mode synchronous is active In other cases the operating mode asynchronous is active If you wish to interco...

Page 385: ... 116 Max voltage diff V2 V1 2 0 V Default setting _ 5041 117 Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 10 Hz Default setting _ 5041 118 Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 10 Hz For information see Parameter for synchronous operation Parameter for synchronous operation Maximum voltage diff of voltage and angle Default setting _ 5041 122 Max voltage diff V2 V1 5 0 V Default setting _ 5041 123 Max voltage diff V2 V1 5 0 V ...

Page 386: ...Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 103 Sychr Asycr 1 V1 V2 without voltage 0 300 V to 170 000 V 5 000 V _ 5041 104 Sychr Asycr 1 V1 V2 with voltage 0 300 V to 340 000 V 80 000 V _ 5041 109 Sychr Asycr 1 Supervi sion time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Asynchr op mode _ 5041 114 Sychr Asycr 1 Async operating mode off on on _ 5041 113 Sychr Asycr 1 CB make time 0 01 s to 0 60 s 0 06 s _ 5041 115 ...

Page 387: ...Behavior ENS O _ 5041 53 Sychr Asycr 1 Health ENS O _ 5041 328 Sychr Asycr 1 In progress SPS O _ 5041 324 Sychr Asycr 1 Release close cmd SPS O _ 5041 305 Sychr Asycr 1 All sync conditio OK SPS O _ 5041 303 Sychr Asycr 1 State f synchronous SPS O _ 5041 325 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage difference OK SPS O _ 5041 326 Sychr Asycr 1 Angle difference OK SPS O _ 5041 327 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency diff OK SPS O ...

Page 388: ...e to be assumed If the frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f threshold ASYN SYN parameter asynchronous systems are to be assumed This status occurs in galvanically separated systems for example Both states have their own operating mode with own closing conditions You can switch both operating modes on and off separately parameters Sync operating mode and Async operating mode The ...

Page 389: ...naled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle difference OK If a condition is not fulfilled detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica tions If for example the differential voltage is outside the setting limits the indication V dif too large V2 V1 is issued The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 must be inc...

Page 390: ...s_adj_comm 1 en_US Figure 6 77 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions Control Functions 6 4 Synchronization Function 390 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 391: ...nd the closing time of the circuit breaker This is calculated in such a way that the voltage phasors are equal at the moment of closing the circuit breaker poles ΔU 0 Δα 0 Ranges in the Voltage Frequency Diagram V f Diagram The following figure shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V f diagram For synchronous systems the frequency band is very narrow owing...

Page 392: ...reaction that is an exceedance of the desired target value A settable dead time intercepts transient states The balancing commands are active once the synchronization function has been started Balancing Commands for Voltage The parameters Max voltage diff V2 V1 and Max voltage diff V2 V1 are used to determine the voltage range that defines the admissible voltage difference for asynchronous paralle...

Page 393: ...specify a positive value the generators are supersynchronously switched in parallel to the network and can immediately transmit active power to the network The parameters T f pulse min and T f pulse max define the minimum and maximum duration of the balancing pulse The parameter df dt of the controller defines the speed for the set point value change of the frequency control The functionality uses...

Page 394: ...y emitted if the frequency difference falls below the setting value for the parameter f threshold ASYN SYN You can find the parameter f threshold ASYN SYN in the entry block Synchr op mode The actuating time of the kick pulse is defined with the parameter Δf for the kick pulse The following equation applies fo_frequency adujsting command_01 1 en_US with tfact Pulse duration Δf for the kick pulse P...

Page 395: ...y be synchronized with a system when there is a certain amount of slip The frequency difference is a measure for the slip within the functionality A practically constant frequency difference is assumed when determining the switching point When adjusting the frequency take care that no frequency balancing commands are issued near a potential switching point When the frequency is in the admissible b...

Page 396: ...er Function group connections Connect meas uring points to function group Route the system side transformer connections in the FG Circuit breaker to the input V Sync 1 Route the generator side transformer connections in the FG Circuit breaker to the input V Sync 2 The following figures show possible connection variants for the voltage transformers dw_dim_two_3ph voltage trans 1 en_US Figure 6 84 C...

Page 397: ...o the logical signals Route at least the functional measured values _ 2311 300 dV _ 2311 301 df and _ 2311 302 dα into the fault record This allows you to document the commissioning and subsequently the quality of synchronization The asynchronous operating mode defines the automatic synchronization of generators For this reason the parameters for this operating mode are described in the following ...

Page 398: ...edundant 2nd channel If V1 5 V dead busbar the binary input signal _ 506 Op mode V1 V2 is active sc_FB_spglos_sch 1 en_US Figure 6 88 De en gized Switch Block for Syn Asy Bal Stage in the DIGSI Setting Sheet i i NOTE In the black start application a 3 phase voltage connection provides the advantage that all voltages are monitored This increases the safety of this application Parameters Sync operat...

Page 399: ...se max _ 134 dV per second _ 135 T pause V _ 136 Smoothing _ 137 V Vrated f frated Parameter Balancing voltage V2 Default setting _ 131 Balancing voltage V2 off With the parameter Balancing voltage V2 you specify whether you wish to issue balancing commands for the voltage V2 on the generator side or not If you wish to issue balancing commands for the voltage 2 alternatives are available for volta...

Page 400: ...per second 2 V s Use the following equation to estimate the duration of the balancing pulse fo_du dt_2v s 1 en_US The calculated duration of the setting pulse is 2 s The setting value of the parameter _ 133 T V pulse max limits the maximum duration of the setting pulse to 1 s In this case the value of 1 s applies Parameter T pause V Default setting _ 135 T pause V 5 00 s With the parameter T pause...

Page 401: ...the plant In case of deviations you must correct the default setting EXAMPLE Permissible value V Vrated f frated 1 1 Primary rated voltage of the generator Vprim 10 5 kV Primary voltage of the voltage transformer Vprim trans 10 kV This results in the following secondary setting value fo_v rated_the_generator 1 en_US Parameters for Balancing Commands used to Control the Frequency The following para...

Page 402: ...x 1 00 s With the parameter T f pulse max you set the maximum time of the control pulse The default setting is a practicable value This allows you to avoid overadjustment of the speed in case of major frequency differ ences Parameter df dt of the controller Default setting _ 144 df dt of the controller 1 00 Hz s With the parameter df dt of the controller you adjust the balancing commands to the co...

Page 403: ...uate necessitating corresponding adjustment Smoothing results in proportional transmission behavior with a delay of the 1st order PT1 behavior Figure 6 89 allows you to estimate the effect of the setting value of the parameter Parameter T close without balancing Default setting _ 148 T close without balancing 5 00 s With the parameter T close without balancing you set the time within which no bala...

Page 404: ...alue as the parameter Δf set point for balancing The setting value of 0 04 Hz leads to the following duration for the kick pulse fo_frequency adujsting command_02 1 en_US If the controller does not respond to this brief pulse tfact t pulse min the minimum pulse T f pulse min applies Parameter Stabilization Default setting _ 151 Stabilization no If the dead time is too short the parameter Stabiliza...

Page 405: ... 340 000 V 80 000 V _ 109 Syn Asy bal Supervi sion time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Asynchr op mode _ 114 Syn Asy bal Async operating mode off on off _ 113 Syn Asy bal CB make time 0 01 s to 0 60 s 0 06 s _ 115 Syn Asy bal Max voltage diff V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V 2 000 V _ 116 Syn Asy bal Max voltage diff V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V 2 000 V _ 117 Syn Asy bal Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 000 Hz to 4 0...

Page 406: ...f balancing pulses off _ 142 Syn Asy bal T f pulse min 0 01 s to 1 00 s 0 10 s _ 143 Syn Asy bal T f pulse max 0 01 s to 60 00 s 1 00 s _ 144 Syn Asy bal df dt of the controller 0 05 Hz s to 5 00 Hz s 1 00 Hz s _ 145 Syn Asy bal T pause f 0 10 s to 60 00 s 10 00 s _ 146 Syn Asy bal Δf set point for balancing 1 00 Hz to 1 00 Hz 0 04 Hz _ 147 Syn Asy bal Smoothing 1 to 100 1 _ 148 Syn Asy bal T clos...

Page 407: ... Syn Asy bal Cond V1 V2 fulfilled SPS O _ 308 Syn Asy bal Cond V1 V2 fulfilled SPS O _ 309 Syn Asy bal Frequency f1 fmax SPS O _ 310 Syn Asy bal Frequency f1 fmin SPS O _ 311 Syn Asy bal Frequency f2 fmax SPS O _ 312 Syn Asy bal Frequency f2 fmin SPS O _ 313 Syn Asy bal Voltage V1 Vmax SPS O _ 314 Syn Asy bal Voltage V1 Vmin SPS O _ 315 Syn Asy bal Voltage V2 Vmax SPS O _ 316 Syn Asy bal Voltage V...

Page 408: ...6 Hz are detected and smoothed This stabilizes the release checks in the presence of frequently changing violations of upper and lower limits for the specified frequency threshold values The option affects the frequency check of the Synchrocheck stage types and the synchronous operating mode of the Synchronous Asyn chronous stage type It does not affect the asynchronous operating mode In the examp...

Page 409: ...ch are then applied next to the closing condi tions for the synchronism Settings Description Close cmd at V1 V2 Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power system is energized and the part of the electrical power system U2 is de energized Close cmd at V1 V2 Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power system is de energized and the part of the electrical ...

Page 410: ...conditions must at least be fulfilled with de energized connection before closing is allowed Application and Setting Notes If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de energized the parts of the electrical power system can be connected together via the following operating modes The above potential release conditions are independent of one another and can also be combined 6 4 11 2...

Page 411: ...power system is de energized the release for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed The setting depends on the operational requirements Note the above information Parameter Close cmd at V1 V2 Recommended setting value _ 5071 107 Close cmd at V1 V2 no Settings Description no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode yes If the...

Page 412: ...ose command is necessary Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal Op mode dir cls cmd see also Figure 6 93 This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly acti vated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching Direct Close Command You can activate the operating mode direct close command statically via the Direct close command par...

Page 413: ...escribed in chapter 6 4 6 Sequence of Func tions After fulfilling all closing conditions the synchronization sends a release signal to the control which closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function losynaw1 310111 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 93 Interaction of the Control with the Synchronization Function With External Control You have the option of controlling the synchroniza...

Page 414: ...nal Control External Synchronization Description The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device 6 4 14 6 4 14 1 Control Functions 6 4 Synchronization Function 414 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 415: ...l synchronization into command processing so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source If a circuit breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present the external synchroniza tion device is started After successfully checking the synchronization conditions the close command is issued from the external synchronization device to the circuit breaker If a...

Page 416: ...rol function group You can instantiate only 1 External synchronization function block within these function groups at a time scextsyn 041116 01 1 en_US Figure 6 97 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit Breaker Function Group It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchroniza tion function in the same Circ...

Page 417: ...hronization device you can also close the circuit breaker directly without considering the synchronization conditions To do this activate the input signal Op mode dir cls cmd or the parameter _ 110 Direct close command The close command is then issued directly by the bay controller Application and Setting Notes External Synchronization Parameter Mode Default setting _ 1 Mode on With the Mode param...

Page 418: ... 340 000 V 80 000 V _ 109 Syn Asy bal Supervi sion time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Asynchr op mode _ 114 Syn Asy bal Async operating mode off on off _ 113 Syn Asy bal CB make time 0 01 s to 0 60 s 0 06 s _ 115 Syn Asy bal Max voltage diff V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V 2 000 V _ 116 Syn Asy bal Max voltage diff V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V 2 000 V _ 117 Syn Asy bal Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 000 Hz to 4 0...

Page 419: ... _ 142 Syn Asy bal T f pulse min 0 01 s to 1 00 s 0 10 s _ 143 Syn Asy bal T f pulse max 0 01 s to 60 00 s 1 00 s _ 144 Syn Asy bal df dt of the controller 0 05 Hz s to 5 00 Hz s 1 00 Hz s _ 145 Syn Asy bal T pause f 0 10 s to 60 00 s 5 00 s _ 146 Syn Asy bal Δf set point for balancing 1 00 Hz to 1 00 Hz 0 04 Hz _ 147 Syn Asy bal Smoothing 1 to 100 1 _ 148 Syn Asy bal T close without balancing 1 0...

Page 420: ... Synchrocheck 1 Mode off on test off _ 5071 101 Synchrocheck 1 Min oper ating limit Vmin 0 300 V to 340 000 V 90 000 V _ 5071 102 Synchrocheck 1 Max operat limit Vmax 0 300 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 5071 110 Synchrocheck 1 Max durat sync process 0 00 s to 3600 00 s 30 00 s _ 5071 108 Synchrocheck 1 Direct close command no yes no _ 5071 126 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage adjustment 0 500 to 2 000 1 000 De...

Page 421: ...Asycr 1 Max durat sync process 0 00 s to 3600 00 s 30 00 s _ 5041 108 Sychr Asycr 1 Direct close command no yes no _ 5041 126 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage adjustment 0 500 to 2 000 1 000 De en gized switch _ 5041 105 Sychr Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 106 Sychr Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 107 Sychr Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 103 Sychr Asycr 1 V1 V2 without ...

Page 422: ...limitation _ 140 Adv options Limit dfdiff dt for sync op 0 1 false _ 141 Adv options Max value dfdiff dt syn 0 010 Hz sto 0 025 Hz s 0 010 Hz s _ 142 Adv options Limit dfdiff dt for asyn op 0 1 false _ 143 Adv options Max value dfdiff dt asyn 0 050 Hz sto 0 500 Hz s 0 050 Hz s Frequ oscillations _ 150 Adv options Suppr frequ oscillations 0 1 false _ 151 Adv options Max diff f threshold 0 000 Hzto ...

Page 423: ...hrocheck 1 Cond V1 V2 fulfilled SPS O _ 5071 309 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f1 fmax SPS O _ 5071 310 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f1 fmin SPS O _ 5071 311 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f2 fmax SPS O _ 5071 312 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f2 fmin SPS O _ 5071 313 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage V1 Vmax SPS O _ 5071 314 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage V1 Vmin SPS O _ 5071 315 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage V2 Vmax SPS O _ 5071 316 Synchro...

Page 424: ...d SPS O _ 5041 308 Sychr Asycr 1 Cond V1 V2 fulfilled SPS O _ 5041 309 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f1 fmax SPS O _ 5041 310 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f1 fmin SPS O _ 5041 311 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f2 fmax SPS O _ 5041 312 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f2 fmin SPS O _ 5041 313 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage V1 Vmax SPS O _ 5041 314 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage V1 Vmin SPS O _ 5041 315 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage V2 Vmax SPS O _ 5...

Page 425: ...ction groups or in a user defined function group One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence The function block is the interface for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence The task of the function block is to verify the relative conditions for control commands for example switching authority interlocking condi tions etc You can connect the s...

Page 426: ...y page Input Cancel during rising edge for example via binary input Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol for example IEC 61850 T103 or DNP Input Cancel via a function key Controllable Cancel via a function key On Site Operation If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device a new Switching sequences entry is shown in the first line of the Co...

Page 427: ... With the Check double activat blk parameter you can determine whether the double activation of switching devices should be checked The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will be started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are activated provided that double activation blocking was activated for those switching devices Parameter Time out monitorin...

Page 428: ...s of the switching mode If the time out monitoring is activated parameter Time out monitoring the process feedback must take place via the inputs Successful and Failed If the last switching command of the switching sequence was executed successfully the input Successful usually is set To do this connect the feedback of the last switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block d...

Page 429: ...hould switch off feeder bay C4 The circuit breaker is opened followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors Scssc4as 110913 01 1 en_US Figure 6 104 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off Control Functions 6 5 Switching Sequences SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 429 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 430: ...ion of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient The feedback of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices The benefit of such assessment is the fact that in case of a failure waiting for the time out is not necessary but the active switching sequence can be ended immediately In this example the use of the EN_I input of ...

Page 431: ... Swi seq Specific sw auth valid for station station remote remote station remote _ 153 Swi seq Num of specific sw auth 2 to 5 2 _ 154 Swi seq Multiple specific sw auth 0 1 false Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Swi seq _ 501 Swi seq Enable start SPS I _ 502 Swi seq Enable start fixed SPS I _ 503 Swi seq Start SPS I _ 504 Swi seq Cancel SPS I _ 505 Swi seq Successful SPS I _ 506...

Page 432: ... every user defined signal for example SPS DPC INC in the function block and route the corresponding indications see following figure scbenutz 1 en_US Figure 6 105 Information Routing with Inserted User Defined Function Block Control Process Indications and Some Individual Indications Application and Setting Notes The function block contains the parameters _ 104 Check switching authority _ 105 Che...

Page 433: ...eck swi auth for Mode Default setting _ 150 Check swi auth for Mode no With the Check swi auth for Mode parameter you specify whether the switching authority for the command source must be checked when switching the controllable Mode controllable to the mode On Off or Test If you set the parameter Check swi auth for Mode to yes the switching command is only executed with appropriate switching auth...

Page 434: ...iple specific sw auth 0 1 false Information List No Information Data Class Type Type U def FB ctl _ 503 U def FB ctl Sw authority local SPS I _ 504 U def FB ctl Sw authority remote SPS I _ 505 U def FB ctl Sw mode interlocked SPS I _ 506 U def FB ctl Sw mode non interl SPS I _ 51 U def FB ctl Mode controllable ENC C _ 52 U def FB ctl Behavior ENS O _ 53 U def FB ctl Health ENS O _ 302 U def FB ctl...

Page 435: ...nctions folder Drag and drop the desired function block into a func tion group or a function Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC charts i i NOTE The user defined function groups and the user defined functions can be used to group the CFC chart ...

Page 436: ...time of the CFC chart Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Chrt sett Bool _ 105 Chrt sett Bool Value 0 1 false Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Chart setting Int _ 105 Chart setting Int Value 2147483648 to 2147483647 10 Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Chrt sett real _ 105 Chrt sett real Value 10000000000 000 to 10000000000 000 100 000 Informati...

Page 437: ...roller is controlled by the function group Tap changer which you can select from the DIGSI library group Switching devices sc_tssdig 1 en_US Figure 6 108 Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC Binary Controlled Step Position Information based on IEC 61850 You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired numbe...

Page 438: ...s To use the function keys you create 2 user defined single point indications SPS These are used for the func tion keys for example F1 Higher function key and F2 Lower function key and as the input signals for the appropriate CFC blocks In addition you must use the controllable Cmd with feedback for the CFC chart Control Functions 6 8 Transformer Tap Changers 438 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Contro...

Page 439: ...or checking the proper operation of the tap changer mechanism The Tap changer function calculates the next logical tap position as a result of the higher lower command The time of position detection is determined as a function of the availability of the motor sliding contact After resetting the active motor sliding contact the Tap changer function reads the new tap position value If the value for ...

Page 440: ...te Warning Executing tap changer commands is still possible You can reset the health state of alarm block or warning manually using the controllable Reset errors Main menu Device functions Reset functions Tap changer As an alternative to this you can also switch off the supervision function and then switch it on again Operating Meter The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting...

Page 441: ...he motor sliding contact Parameter Check switching authority Default setting _ 104 Check switching authority yes With the Check switching authority parameter you specify whether the switching authority on site remote is checked in case of an adjusting command see also chapter 6 3 1 Command Checks and Switch gear Interlocking Protection Parameter Control model Default setting _ 108 Control model SB...

Page 442: ... behavior alarm block You can select whether the supervision is switched off off or if only a warning is indicated warning With the alarm block setting an alarm indication is generated and the function is blocked Parameter Motor supervision time Default setting _ 113 Motor supervision time 10 s After the motor supervision time has elapsed the indication Motor sup time expired is displayed Addition...

Page 443: ...fset Parameter Tap display offset Default setting Tap display offset 0 If you want to move the height of the displayed value in a positive or the negative direction with respect to the height of the actual value enter the value for this in the Tap display offset field Parameter Number of bits f tap code Default setting Number of bits f tap code 4 With the Number of bits f tap code parameter you se...

Page 444: ...ding is in binary Table 6 25 Routing of the Binary Inputs Tap Coding Type binary Example BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Tap changer X X X X Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving contact Tap 1 1 0 0 With 3 binary inputs a maximum of 23 1 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code If all routed binary inputs indicate 0 this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position or 64 with quality in...

Page 445: ...t binary input Yes Individual Tap Coding Type table With the table parameter setting you can specify an individual Tap coding type In the Representation of encoding section select the number system in which your code table entries will take place alternatively Binary 2 characters Octal 8 characters Decimal 10 characters Hexadecimal 16 characters The selected option is valid for all inputs in the E...

Page 446: ...o 3 The encoding uses BCD signed Table 6 27 Routing of the Binary Inputs Tap Coding Type BCD signed Example BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Tap changer X X X Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 Sign Tap 1 1 0 1 Using 3 binary inputs a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD signed This yields the number of tap positions from 3 to 3 If all routed binary inputs indicate 0 this is recognized...

Page 447: ... by a position change on or off Parameter Indication timestamp before filtering Default setting Indication timestamp before filtering no With this parameter you specify whether the hardware filtering time is accounted for in the time stamp of position capture Parameter Chatter blocking Default setting Chatter blocking no With this parameter you switch Chatter blocking on or off Settings Properties...

Page 448: ...ger Highest tap changer pos Lowest voltage tap Highest voltage tap Lowest voltage tap _ 114 Tap changer Lowest tap position 64 to 64 1 _ 115 Tap changer Highest tap position 64 to 64 15 Switching authority _ 117 Tap changer Swi dev related sw auth 0 1 false _ 118 Tap changer Specific sw authorities 0 1 true _ 119 Tap changer Specific sw auth valid for station station remote remote station remote _...

Page 449: ... SPS O _ 309 Tap changer Motor sup time expired SPS O _ 310 Tap changer Trigger motor prot sw SPS O _ 311 Tap changer Position failure SPS O _ 312 Tap changer Op ct INS O _ 313 Tap changer Switching authority ENS O _ 314 Tap changer Switching mode ENS O _ 319 Tap changer Reset failure SPC C _ 317 Tap changer Switching auth station SPC C _ 320 Tap changer Enable sw auth 1 SPC C _ 321 Tap changer En...

Page 450: ...alue and for coordination with other automatic voltage controllers in the system The voltage controller function also monitors the currents on the upper voltage side and the low voltage side of the transformer to block the voltage controller during impermissible operating states overcurrent under current undervoltage The voltage controller function also has limiting values that in special operatin...

Page 451: ...nt 3 phase optional Three winding transformer 2 x voltage 3 phase 2 x current 3 phase optional Grid coupling transformer 2 x voltage 3 phase 2 x current 3 phase Figure 6 117 shows these interfaces as a block structure dwvocnti 060913 01 vsd 3 en_US Figure 6 117 Structure of the Voltage Control Function Group You can find the information and function measured values of the voltage controller in the...

Page 452: ...nger drives The control pulse is issued if the measured voltage deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset voltage range for more than a given time period The voltage can be controlled at the voltage measuring point or at the load point in the electrical power system In this case the load point voltage is calculated on the basis of the measured load current and the known impedan...

Page 453: ... process the voltage to be controlled can be automatically selected via the load current of both sides or by using one parameter This parameter is the settings group switching via binary input protocol or function keys The uncontrolled voltage can be monitored in parallel to ensure that it remains within the defined voltage limits If a current measuring point is assigned to a function group the vo...

Page 454: ...stellation for Three Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for Load Compensation at the End of the Line 1 Only if a transformer side is available Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller 454 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 455: ... and winding 2 voltage measuring inputs V1 V2 and current measuring inputs I1 and I2 must be fed A voltage must be specified as a function of the load situation to the voltage controller as the control variable The voltages of the windings 1 and 2 of the grid coupling transformers are simultaneously monitored In the process you can select the voltage to be controlled using one parameter This param...

Page 456: ...changer The higher and lower adjusting commands are generated by the voltage controller The Check switching authority Control model SBO time out and Feedback monitoring time parameters are set only in the voltage controller You can find more information in chapter 6 9 4 1 General Voltage Controller The Voltage controller function controls the voltage within the bandwidth and within the set voltage...

Page 457: ...t in one of the two windings is greater than the load current in the other winding by 5 of the rated current for 10 s then the winding voltage is controlled using the larger load current Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller For the two winding transformer voltage controller the measurands that are used to manage the feedback control are permanently defined With the grid coupling transforme...

Page 458: ... voltage Vact and compares it to the target voltage Vtarget If the difference between the measured voltage control deviation D is greater than the set bandwidth B a higher or lower adjusting command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay T1 has elapsed You can change the settings for control during operation with the settings group switching 6 9 3 2 Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Contro...

Page 459: ...dth an adjusting command is issued after the set time delay T1 delay If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth before T1 delay elapses no adjusting control command is issued If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth within the time delay T1 the running time delay T1 continues to count down starting at the already elapsed time If the actual voltag...

Page 460: ...T1 delay The characteristic curves arising for different settings of the time T1 delay are shown in chapter 6 9 4 1 General margin title Parameter T1 characteristic Zero Potential or Voltage Recovery If the actual voltage is not within the defined bandwidth after a voltage recovery it can be necessary for the voltage controller to send the 1st adjusting command with the T2 time For this purpose th...

Page 461: ...ituation at point 4 A fast step down mode occurs until the bandwidth has been reached The tap position time between 2 consecutive lower adjusting commands results from the following 2 conditions The completion of a tap change command after the new valid position was detected The measurement time for capturing the new actual voltage The activity of the fast step down mode and the fast step up mode ...

Page 462: ...ou to include the voltage drop of a line connected to the transformer You can switch Z compensation on or off If cos φ is roughly constant you can use Z compensation Setting the parameters requires the calculation of the voltage increase Target voltage rising taking into consideration the load current Max load current The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line ...

Page 463: ...he following figure shows the effect of this compensation type dw line drop kompensation 250214 01 vsd 2 en_US Figure 6 130 Phasor Diagram of the X and R Compensation Vtransf Voltage on the transformer voltage to be controlled Vload Voltage of load point target voltage Vload Vtransf Vdrop Vdrop Voltage drop of the phase IR IX Voltage drop due to R and X of the line Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Co...

Page 464: ... additional restriction of the control range Blockings The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions The following blocking functions are available Undervoltage Overcurrent load current Undercurrent External blocking binary input Blocking command LTCBlock IEC 61850 Blocking in the event of pickup of the transformer differential protection Using the parameter Blocking behavi...

Page 465: ...a transformer If power peaks are to be expected in the power system several transformers can be connected in parallel on different busbars This allows several feeders to be supplied simultaneously You can control up to 8 trans formers in parallel in a group The measured and status values are analyzed via the IEC 61850 GOOSE commu nication If the tap positions differ for the transformers used thus ...

Page 466: ... Parallel control function via setting values or commands Parameters Values With setting values Parallel mode Master No mode Follower Circulat react current Parallel mode changeable by setting controllable Force master changeable by setting controllable With command Parallel control ParOp independent parallel Set master ForceMast off on Parallel groups ParGrp 1 to 4 The state of the control is rep...

Page 467: ...ection via Group Inputs You can control up to 8 transformers in parallel in one group or in 4 groups without detecting the system topology The devices in parallel operation use exclusively the information transmitted from devices of the same parallel control group via GOOSE The groups of the transformers to be controlled in parallel are set and Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller SIPROTEC 5 H...

Page 468: ... and Parallel mode active are transmitted via the GOOSE communication between the other transformers in the group lo_proxy logic part_03 1 en_US Figure 6 134 Logic of the Blocking of Automatic Operation in the ParallelProxy 1 Only applies to the Master Follower method The signals automatic operation automatic block local Health and Remote parallel mode are transmitted via the GOOSE communication b...

Page 469: ...rallel control set the parameters Parallel mode changeable and Force master changeable You can select one of the 2 options by setting controllable sc_para_oper_change 1 en_US Figure 6 136 Selection for Parallel Control If you set Parallel mode changeable to controllable you can read and change the settings for the parallel control on the device under the following path Main menu Commands Functiona...

Page 470: ...ion Master Follower method The Master device controls the busbar voltage automatically according to the same principles of the available voltage controller functionality for a two winding trans former Compared with the Master Slave method this method has the advantage that losing a higher lower adjusting command for example due to communication loss or auxiliary voltage failure of the Follower dev...

Page 471: ...er device When doing so the maximum tap position difference is taken into account If the tap position difference is exceeded for a predefined time an error is reported Error tap differ ence If the monitoring of a group detects that there is more than one Master device this is reported and the automatic operation is blocked Manual Operation Master Follower Changing the tap of the tap changer using ...

Page 472: ...current for transformers operated in parallel Calculation of the Circulating Reactive Current To calculate the circulating reactive current the measured values of the individual transformers must be trans mitted between the affected voltage controllers The suitable reference variable for all transformers in a parallel group is the bus voltage With this there is a common reference between all devic...

Page 473: ...current is used fo_loadcurccm 1 en_US The circulating reactive current at transformer k is the difference of the current measured at the transformer and the calculated partial load current ILkImag This is multiplied with 1 so that its positive no load voltage difference results in a positive circulating reactive current fo_ccmtrafo 1 en_US where ILkImag Calculated inductive part imaginary part of ...

Page 474: ...T2 This results for both voltage controllers in a different total deviation Negative voltage deviation DV Changing to higher tap of T2 with DV DCRC2 B Positive voltage deviation DV Changing to lower tap of T1 with DV DCRC1 B For the calculation of the voltage deviation the voltages of all voltage controllers are transferred with GOOSE as a measured value and an average value is calculated The volt...

Page 475: ...device state and measured values get the quality attribute OperatorBlocked TRUE This also applies to the output from CFC charts If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message the receiver devices can analyze the quality After a switch off of the transmitting device the receiver devices detect that the transmitting device has been logged off func tionally and did not fail Now the receiving objects ...

Page 476: ...matic operation is blocked for safety reasons in the Master and Follower device Once the communication error has been cleared the blocking is removed You can find more information about setting a GOOSE connection between the devices in the following chapter Creating a GOOSE Later Binding for Parallel Control To create the GOOSE later binding between the devices for parallel control proceed as desc...

Page 477: ...e voltage controller function for the two winding transformer and the Parallel control function and the proxies that are necessary for parallel operation One ParallelProxy is required for each transformer to be controlled in parallel that is for 3 transformers in the project it must be addition ally instantiate 2 ParallelProxies Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay ...

Page 478: ...that you must assign a separate IP address for each device i i NOTE Note the hardware equipment of the device and the settings for the IEC 61850 communication IEC 61850 Edition 2 required Under Device Information in DIGSI change IEC 61850 Edition 1 to Edition 2 Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller 478 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 479: ... the 1st device as many times as are needed for the parallel transformers The copied devices contain the same settings Adapt the IP addresses of the copied devices in the project tree under Hardware and protocols Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 479 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 480: ...er transformers device name and IEC 61850 name sc_lbnametrafo 1 en_US Figure 6 150 Adapting the Devices in DIGSI Assign a unique transformer ID for the other transformers in the copied devices Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller 480 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 481: ...ion name for example in parallel operation Change IEC 61850 Edition 1 to Edition 2 sc_par_stat_iec_edi 1 en_US Figure 6 152 Selecting the IEC 61850 Edition Confirm the conversion to IEC 61850 Edition 2 with Yes Use to assign the devices to the IEC 61850 station sc_par_assign_syscon 1 en_US Figure 6 153 Assigning the Devices Export the IEC 61850 station as an ICD file to the IEC 61850 System Config...

Page 482: ... sc_para_assinged 1 en_US Figure 6 155 Export dialog Step 4 Import the ICD files into the system configurator After the export to the system configurator the config urator starts automatically Create a single line configuration in the system configurator Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller 482 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 483: ...ndividual bays bays 1 3 and instantiate for each a function and subfunction Rename the function to VoltageControlParallel Rename the subfunction to Proxies i i NOTE If you use the specified function and subfunction names the GOOSE application will be created without faults Control Functions 6 9 Voltage Controller SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 483 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017...

Page 484: ... System Configurator save the project and close the IEC 61850 System Configurator sc_parasyscon_goose 1 en_US Figure 6 157 Creating the GOOSE Application Step 6 Import the SCD file generated and stored in the IEC 61850 System Configurator back to DIGSI sc_para_import 1 en_US Figure 6 158 Import from the IEC 61850 System Configurator into DIGSI Load the created configuration to the devices Function...

Page 485: ... when line compensation is activated A A Load current referenced to the rated current of the function I circul Currently measured circulating reactive current A A Circulating reactive current Vact m Currently measured control voltage kV V Current voltage of the control referenced to the rated voltage of the function ΔVactV Voltage difference Voltage difference referenced to the rated voltage of th...

Page 486: ...erenced to the rated current of winding 2 Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 Vmax 2 Maximum voltage of winding 2 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 2 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 2 Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 Vmin 2 Minimu...

Page 487: ... Target voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 V tar w2 Target voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of winding 2 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 2 The function measured values Vmax 1 Vmax 2 Vmin 1 and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication Reset min max For the grid coupling transformer you can find the measured values under the following menu entri...

Page 488: ...Qtotal Reactive power total power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated Stotal Apparent power total power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated Cos φ Active power factor abs abs 100 corresponds to cos φ 1 Application and Setting Notes General The following application and setting notes refer to a two winding transformer The additional parameters for a ...

Page 489: ...etting _ 14011 1 Mode on With the Mode parameter you switch the voltage controller in on off or in test operation Parameter Operating mode Default setting _ 14011 101 Operating mode Manual With the Operating mode parameter you specify whether the controller is operating in Auto mode or in Manual mode Three Winding Transformer only Parameter Winding selection Default setting _ 15601 157 Winding sel...

Page 490: ...mmand The range of values extends from 0 01 s to 1800 00 s This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and command execution command model as per IEC 61850 7 2 Parameter Feedback monitoring time Default setting _ 111 Feedback monitoring time 10 00 s Reaching a new tap position after the adjusting command is monitored via the feedback monitoring time If a new tap position is not rea...

Page 491: ...n mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the settings group switching You can specify the target voltages 1 W1 2 to 4 W1 2 in primary secondary or in percent For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input you need a CFC chart Parameter Target voltage 1 w1 Default setting _ 15601 112 Target voltage 1 w1 110 000 V Parameter Target voltage ...

Page 492: ... Parameter Target voltage 4 w2 Default setting _ 16351 170 Target voltage 4 w2 110 000 V Parameter Bandwidth Default setting _ 113 Bandwidth 1 0 With the Bandwidth parameter you specify the voltage range where no control action higher or lower is to occur at the Target voltage 1 If the actual voltage is outside the bandwidth referenced to the Target voltage 1 no correction takes place Calculation ...

Page 493: ...eter T1 delay Default setting _ 115 T1 delay 40 s You can adjust the control action so that the smallest number of adjusting commands possible is necessary To do this using T1 characteristic you set the control response and using T1 delay you set a time delay In the Linear setting linear control response the control response is independent of the voltage deviation A constant time delay applies her...

Page 494: ...ched off by a setting equal to 0 the delay T1 is always active Parameter Fast step up Default setting _ 118 Fast step up off Parameter Fast step up limit Default setting _ 119 Fast step up limit 6 0 Parameter Fast step up T delay Default setting _ 120 Fast step up T delay 2 0 s With this parameter you specify the time delay of the fast step up mode If the actual voltage is less than the value of t...

Page 495: ...15601 163 while it is _ 16351 163 for the grid coupling transformer Parameter Set point mode active Default setting _ 14011 160 Set point mode active on With the Set point mode active on parameter you can send a target voltage to the controller via a communication network The voltage controller uses the specified voltage value as target voltage If the controller does not receive any valid voltage ...

Page 496: ...e transformer Example Application example of the LDC Z line compensation for the voltage control of 2 transformers connected in parallel dw_target_voltage_2exam 1 en_US Figure 6 160 LDC Z Line Compensation of 2 Parallel Transformers In the example a load current of Iload 1430 A results in a voltage drop of Vload 500 V Value Transformer T1 Transformer T2 Iload 100 50 Target voltage rising ΔVload 4 ...

Page 497: ...e Parameter X line Default setting _ 14011 154 X line 0 00 Ω With the X line parameter you set the reactance for the line to be protected In order to determine the voltage drop by the line entering the parameter R line and X line is necessary for the procedure Line drop compensation LDC XandR If the primary values are known and you would like to set the secondary values use the following formula f...

Page 498: ...h the parameters Lower tap position limit and Higher tap position limit you can restrict the taps available in automatic operation For example using the parameter Higher tap position limit changes to higher taps to excessive ratios that would result in overvoltages in the event of a sudden loss of load are blocked Parameter Vmin limiting Default setting _ 14011 128 Vmin limiting on Parameter Vmin ...

Page 499: ...t setting _ 14011 136 V Threshold 90 000 V Parameter V Time delay Default setting _ 14011 137 V Time delay 0 s Parameter I Blocking Default setting _ 14011 138 I Blocking on Parameter I Threshold Default setting _ 14011 139 I Threshold 150 Parameter I Time delay Default setting _ 14011 140 I Time delay 0 s If the load current exceeds the threshold value I Threshold for the time I Time delay the ov...

Page 500: ...e by setting With the Force master changeable parameter you can determine by setting or via the setting controllable which device is the Master in the parallel control In a group of transformers working in parallel only one device can be the Master The presence of a Master is monitored Parameter Maximal tap difference Default setting _ 14011 166 Maximal tap difference 2 With the Maximal tap differ...

Page 501: ...tings Two Winding Transformer and Parallel Control Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Ref for values _ 2311 101 General Rated current 0 20 A to 100000 00 A 1000 00 A _ 2311 102 General Rated voltage 0 20 kV to 1200 00 kV 400 00 kV _ 2311 106 General Rated app power transf 0 20 MVA to 5000 00 MVA 692 82 MVA _ 2311 108 General Imp Z short circuit imp 1 00 to 20 00 10 00 General _ 14011...

Page 502: ...1 121 90V V contr 2w Fast step down off on on _ 14011 122 90V V contr 2w Fast step down limit 0 0 to 50 0 6 0 _ 14011 123 90V V contr 2w Fast step down T delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s 0 0 s _ 14011 124 90V V contr 2w Function monitoring 0 min to 120 min 15 min _ 14011 155 90V V contr 2w Regulate with T2 at start off on on _ 14011 160 90V V contr 2w Set point mode active off on on Parallel operation _ 1401...

Page 503: ... Lower tap position limit 128 to 127 1 _ 14011 103 90V V contr 2w Higher tap position limit 128 to 127 15 _ 14011 128 90V V contr 2w Vmin limiting off on on _ 14011 129 90V V contr 2w Vmin threshold 10 000 V to 340 000 V 105 000 V _ 14011 130 90V V contr 2w Vmin time delay 0 s to 20 s 10 s _ 14011 131 90V V contr 2w Vmax limiting off on on _ 14011 132 90V V contr 2w Vmax threshold 10 000 V to 340 ...

Page 504: ...r 3w Winding selection Winding 1 Winding 2 WithMaxLoad Winding 1 _ 15601 161 90V V contr 3w Winding selection Winding 1 Winding 2 Winding 1 Control tap changer _ 15601 107 90V V contr 3w Check switching authority no yes yes _ 15601 109 90V V contr 3w Control model direct w normal secur SBO w normal secur direct w enh security SBO w enh security SBO w enh security _ 15601 110 90V V contr 3w SBO tim...

Page 505: ... step up limit 50 0 to 0 0 6 0 _ 15601 120 90V V contr 3w Fast step up T delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s 2 0 s _ 15601 121 90V V contr 3w Fast step down off on on _ 15601 122 90V V contr 3w Fast step down limit 0 0 to 50 0 6 0 _ 15601 123 90V V contr 3w Fast step down T delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s 0 0 s _ 15601 124 90V V contr 3w Function monitoring 0 min to 120 min 15 min _ 15601 162 90V V contr 3w Power flow su...

Page 506: ...0 V to 340 000 V 115 000 V _ 15601 149 90V V contr 3w Vmax threshold w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 115 000 V _ 15601 133 90V V contr 3w Vmax time delay 0 s to 20 s 10 s Blocking _ 15601 134 90V V contr 3w Blocking behavior Auto Auto Manual Auto Manual _ 15601 135 90V V contr 3w V Blocking off on on _ 15601 136 90V V contr 3w V Threshold w1 10 000 V to 340 000 V 90 000 V _ 15601 150 90V V contr 3w V Thr...

Page 507: ...SBO w enh security SBO w enh security _ 16351 110 90V V contr gc SBO time out 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 30 00 s _ 16351 111 90V V contr gc Feedback monitoring time 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 10 00 s Voltage Control _ 16351 164 90V V contr gc Number of target voltage 1 2 3 4 1 _ 16351 112 90V V contr gc Target voltage 1 w1 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 16351 165 90V V contr gc Target voltage 2 w1 10 000 V t...

Page 508: ... 16351 163 90V V contr gc Regulate with T2 at start off on on _ 16351 171 90V V contr gc Set point mode active off on on Line drop comp _ 16351 125 90V V contr gc Line drop compensation off LDC Z LDC XandR off _ 16351 126 90V V contr gc Target voltage rising w1 0 0 to 20 0 4 0 _ 16351 147 90V V contr gc Target voltage rising w2 0 0 to 20 0 4 0 _ 16351 127 90V V contr gc Max load current 0 0 to 500...

Page 509: ...hold w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 90 000 V _ 16351 137 90V V contr gc V Time delay 0 s to 20 s 0 s _ 16351 138 90V V contr gc I Blocking off on on _ 16351 139 90V V contr gc I Threshold 10 to 500 150 _ 16351 140 90V V contr gc I Time delay 0 s to 20 s 0 s _ 16351 141 90V V contr gc I Blocking off on off _ 16351 142 90V V contr gc I Threshold 3 to 100 10 _ 16351 143 90V V contr gc I Time delay 0 s to 2...

Page 510: ...ntr 2w Vact m MV O _ 14011 321 90V V contr 2w ΔV act MV O _ 14011 334 90V V contr 2w ΔVactV MV O _ 14011 335 90V V contr 2w ΔVactC MV O _ 14011 322 90V V contr 2w I load MV O _ 14011 364 90V V contr 2w PhAng MV O _ 14011 336 90V V contr 2w I load Σ MV O _ 14011 365 90V V contr 2w I circul MV O _ 14011 323 90V V contr 2w V max MV O _ 14011 324 90V V contr 2w V min MV O _ 14011 325 90V V contr 2w V ...

Page 511: ...w Auto Monitor SPS O _ 15601 357 90V V contr 3w Power flow superv SPS O _ 15601 310 90V V contr 3w Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O _ 15601 311 90V V contr 3w Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O _ 15601 312 90V V contr 3w Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O _ 15601 313 90V V contr 3w Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O _ 15601 314 90V V contr 3w Auto Blocking SPS O _ 15601 315 90V V contr 3w Manual Blocking SPS O _ 15601 316 90V V contr 3w V Blo...

Page 512: ... max SPS I _ 16351 53 90V V contr gc Health ENS O _ 16351 54 90V V contr gc Inactive SPS O _ 16351 52 90V V contr gc Behavior ENS O _ 16351 301 90V V contr gc End Higher pos Auto SPS O _ 16351 302 90V V contr gc End Lower pos Auto SPS O _ 16351 332 90V V contr gc Cmd with feedback BSC C _ 16351 335 90V V contr gc Block auto SPC C _ 16351 336 90V V contr gc Operating mode SPC C _ 16351 305 90V V co...

Page 513: ... w1 SPC C _ 16351 359 90V V contr gc Target voltage 2 w1 SPC C _ 16351 360 90V V contr gc Target voltage 3 w1 SPC C _ 16351 361 90V V contr gc Target voltage 4 w1 SPC C _ 16351 362 90V V contr gc Target voltage 1 w2 SPC C _ 16351 363 90V V contr gc Target voltage 2 w2 SPC C _ 16351 364 90V V contr gc Target voltage 3 w2 SPC C _ 16351 365 90V V contr gc Target voltage 4 w2 SPC C _ 16351 366 90V V c...

Page 514: ...514 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 515: ... 3 Phase Voltage 783 7 14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive Sequence Voltage 795 7 15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 799 7 16 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 805 7 17 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 818 7 18 Overfrequency Protection 824 7 19 Underfrequency Protection 829 7 20 Underfrequency Load Shedding 834 7 21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 846 7 22 Power ...

Page 516: ...esource consumption tab Structure of the Function The function Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP can be used in the Circuit breaker function group dwstrbfp 260213 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 1 Structure Embedding of the Function Figure 7 2 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function The start is initiated by the device internal protection function or by an external protect...

Page 517: ...ilure protection function can in this case only drop out if the circuit breaker is detected to be open This is detected using the current flow or circuit breaker auxiliary contact criterion If necessary the Circuit breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function trips internal starting signal is not held Using routing you c...

Page 518: ...arameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1 channel or 2 channel signal The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting If a routing is missing an error message is generated The Health signal changes to the state Warning Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 518 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay...

Page 519: ...n this case the start remains active when the binary input signals have a falling edge The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function If either of the signals Start or Release is active for more than the set supervision time without the func tion picking up an error in the binary input circuit is assumed The corresponding signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup...

Page 520: ...t with the dropout of the starting signal The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms SW filter see Figure 7 7 logikext 070611 02 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 7 External Start of the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Function Logic of the 3 Pole Circuit Breaker Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 520 SIPROTEC 5 Hig...

Page 521: ...Start with 1 3 Pole Circuit Breaker Based on the starting signals it is determined whether it is a 1 pole or a multi pole start see Figure 7 9 This information is required for starting the various time delays Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 521 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 522: ...d value is then ineffective The binary signal Threshold sensitive is used for the switch over If you set the 3I0 criterion parameter to Direct release you prevent the plausibility check of the zero sequence current In this way a pickup only by way of this current can be achieved With the Threshold 3I0 dir release parameter you set the threshold value to be exceeded If you set the I2 criterion para...

Page 523: ...th the 1 3 pole circuit breaker the position is determined pole selectively via the double point indications If the double point indication is not routed the output is an error message Furthermore the Health signal changes to the state Warning The detection of a static disturbed position not an intermediate position has the effect that the circuit breaker auxiliary contact criterion is not used th...

Page 524: ...If no current is flowing at the start time the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit breaker auxil iary contact criterion For this purpose the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion When the current begins to flow after the start the function switches over to the current flow criterion If the circuit breaker or a circuit breaker pole with the 1 3 pole cir...

Page 525: ...re 7 3 and Figure 7 7 This means that dropout is controlled solely by the switch or the circuit breaker auxiliary contact criterion If dropout is also to occur on the falling edge of the starting signal that is when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protec tion function trips holding of the start signal must be disabled loanreg1 030211 01 tif 4 en_US Figure 7 13 Pickup Dropout of the Cir...

Page 526: ...itially started by due to a 1 pole start and a multiphase short circuit and multi pole start occur subsequently the corresponding multi pole time is also started so that the both times run in parallel Tripping is determined by the time that expires first If there is a 1 pole start with 3 pole trip repeat the 3 pole T2 time is started If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function a cir...

Page 527: ...e setting is inde pendent of the identically named global parameter that is set in the Device settings lo bbp verza 3ph vsd 5 en_US Figure 7 15 Delay Tripping of the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Function 3 Pole Circuit Breaker Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 527 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 528: ...volved in an external start of the 3 pole CBFP function Figure 7 18 gives this overview for the 1 3 pole function In the case of an internal start there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the CBFP device 7 1 4 Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 528 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 ...

Page 529: ...t Breaker Failure Protection with External Start Tripping Repetition and 3 Pole Tripping T2 Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 529 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 530: ...ic application it can be necessary to exclude certain device internal protection functions from starting the CBFP For instance busbar disconnection following a local circuit breaker failure can be undesirable in the case of load shedding applications or ground faults in isolated resonant grounded systems Where a start exclusively from external sources is required all internal protection functions ...

Page 531: ...uration is the parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs start and release Input Signals 1 3 Pole Circuit Breaker Description Start pole A Start pole B Start pole C Start 3 pole The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection device If the external protection trips phase selectively the CBFP can be started phase selectively via the input si...

Page 532: ...g this method as the standard method yes You can hold the starting signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is open when the external starting signal has a falling edge EXAMPLE Holding external starting signal setting value yes The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission This device generates only a signal pulse i i NOTE Siemens would ...

Page 533: ...t makes sense to connect also the auxiliary contacts to the device in a phase selective way to ensure a pole selective detection of the position To do this select w CB pos closed Lx If pole selective detection is not possible you must set w CB pos closed 3p Observe that the CB is detected as open as soon as the 1st pole has opened Parameter 3I0 criterion Recommended setting value _ 120 3I0 criteri...

Page 534: ...2 dir release Recommended setting value _ 123 Threshold I2 dir release approx 0 5 I2min This parameter is effective only if the I2 criterion parameter is set to Direct release Siemens recom mends setting the threshold to half the permitted negative sequence current I2min to achieve a fast fault clearing in case of an undesired negative sequence system component Parameter Monit time for BI Start Mo...

Page 535: ...for retripping Parameter Delay T1 for 1 pole retrip 1 3 pole Circuit Breaker Delay T1 for 3 pole retrip Default setting 3 pole circuit breaker _ 109 Delay T1 for 3 pole retrip 0 05 s Default setting 1 3 pole circuit breaker _ 113 Delay T1 for 1 pole retrip 0 05 s Default setting 1 3 pole circuit breaker _ 111 Delay T1 for 3 pole retrip 0 25 s The parameters are visible only when retripping is set ...

Page 536: ...ces The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1 If T2 is started afterT1 there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2 EXAMPLE Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open Time of binary device output when tripping is caused by the device internal protection 5 ms CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods assumed rated ...

Page 537: ...is time can be set to 0 if such a transient pickup of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the CB design Output Signal Retrip T1 If only one control circuit is available for the local CB it is not mandatory to route the output signal because the signal also controls the CB trip logic If a 2nd Control circuit is present the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary...

Page 538: ...35 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 2 500 A _ 101 50BF Ad CBF Threshold sensitive 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 250 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 1 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 250 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 1 250 A _ 111 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Delay T1 ...

Page 539: ...ted 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 250 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 1 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 250 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 1 250 A _ 124 50BF Ad CBF Monit time for BI Start 0 05 s to 60 00 s 15 00 s _ 125 50BF Ad CBF Monit tm f BI Release 0 05 s to 60 00 s 15 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type 50BF Ad CBF _ 501 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF S...

Page 540: ...S O _ 306 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Trip T2 ACT O _ 308 50BF Ad CBF BI aux ct rout miss SPS O _ 300 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail BI Start 3pole SPS O _ 300 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail BI start SPS O _ 301 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail BI Start poleA SPS O _ 301 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail BI release SPS O _ 302 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF...

Page 541: ...1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail no BI rel pole A SPS O _ 313 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail no BI rel pole B SPS O _ 314 1 3 pole circuit breaker 50BF Ad CBF Fail no BI rel pole C SPS O _ 315 50BF Ad CBF Immediate Operate SPS O _ 316 50BF Ad CBF CB failure pole ACD O Protection and Automation Functions 7 1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controll...

Page 542: ...if 1 en_US Figure 7 19 Process Diagram of a Two Time Reclosing With Action Time 2nd Reclosing Successful The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts Each of the 8 disruption cycles can work with different parameters Structure of the Function The automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers In a function group for circuit breaker...

Page 543: ... from the opposite end has been placed back under voltage dwaweasp 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 22 Structure Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time ADT Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function The cooperation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the func tion mode Operation with external automatic reclosing ...

Page 544: ...n stages can be configured so that their operate indication blocks the AREC If such a blocking exists the AREC cannot be started If the AREC is already started the blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions The following influence possibilities exist The AREC provides signals that can be us...

Page 545: ...internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions can be set separately for each protection function see Figure 7 25 The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI see the following figure Protection and Automation Functions 7 2 Automatic Reclosing Function SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 545 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 546: ...Automatic Reclosing Function For the cyclic automatic reclosing function there are 4 operating modes from which one can be selected for the parameterization parameter _ 6601 101 79 operating mode The selection of the operating mode is dependent on the tripping behavior of the protection functions and the circuit breaker For applications with 3 pole tripping all 4 operating modes are available Oper...

Page 547: ...with longer operate time The operating mode with op with act time allows for different automatic reclosing cycles depending on the operate time of the protection function s Operating Mode 2 w pickup w action time The operating mode w pickup w action time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending on the operate time and type of fault It is only suitable and applicable for applications w...

Page 548: ...e is configured the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is identical with the cycle number 1 2 and 3 dwaweb3d 240810 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 29 Operating Mode Signal Examples With Tripping Without Action Time Operating Mode 4 w pickup w o act time With the operating mode w pickup w o act time the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the protection f...

Page 549: ...protection functions to the Dead time state After expiration of the dead time the subsequent state is reached with the closing indication The reclaim time is also started together with the closing indication If the reclaim time can expire without further operate or pickup indications the automatic reclosing is successful and the automatic reclosing function turns back to idle state If the automati...

Page 550: ... For operating modes with action time the start of the action time s occurs with the pickup messages During all operating modes the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time 7 2 4 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 2 Automatic Reclosing Function 550 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition ...

Page 551: ... Pickup C for start Optionally the pickup information can be externally captured as a pickup sample thus as a 1 phase 2 phase and 3 phase pickup The outputs of the input logic signalize if the automatic reclosing start occurs through a 1 phase 2 phase or 3 phase pickup On Start with 3 phase pickup it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first raising pickup indicatio...

Page 552: ...e state AREC ready to the state Dead time see Figure 7 34 The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time Start Signal Supervision Time The start signal supervision stops the automatic reclosing if the short circuit is not switched off within the normal time for example in the case of a circuit breaker failure With the first raising operate indication the start signal supe...

Page 553: ...e binary input Dead time start delay As long the corresponding binary signal is present the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not be started The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set parameter Max dead time delay Upon expiration of this time stage that is if the binary signal is present longer than permitted the automatic reclosin...

Page 554: ...hrough the parameter Start from idle state allow and not blocked During one of the started action times the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is assigned the next highest cycle number whose action time is running and is not blocked With raising trip commands the action times are stopped and reset The process state of the action times existing at this moment determine...

Page 555: ...on of the dead time and through a binary input In this way setting the parameter Dead time aft 1ph pickup to invalid avoids an automatic reclosing after 3 pole tripping due to 1 phase short circuits This also applies to Dead time aft 2ph pickup and Dead time aft 3ph pickup If all 3 dead times are set to invalid the respective reclosing cycle will be completely blocked With the binary input Block 7...

Page 556: ...ked With raising trip commands the action times are stopped and reset The process state of the action times existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping the automatic reclosing function does not take place However if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time the autom...

Page 557: ... other configured automatic reclosing cycles The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input In this way setting the parameter Dead time aft 3 pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic reclosing after 3 pole tripping Correspondingly there is no automatic reclosing function after 1 pole tripping if the Dead time aft 1 pole trip 24 to inva...

Page 558: ...pping loauowrk 210311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 37 Cycle Control with Operating Mode With Tripping Without Action Time Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4 With Pickup Without Action Time The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle In Figure 7 38 the cycle control for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated The further automatic rec...

Page 559: ...asso ciated automatic reclosing cycle loanowrk 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 38 Cycle Control with Operating Mode With Pickup Without Action Time Stage Release The function block Stage release creates output indications for the release or switching over of special stages for protection functions stage release in the 1st cycle or stage release in the n cycle Examples for this are the release of ov...

Page 560: ...ndition is identical to the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle If the reduced dead time RDT mode is selected and no additional reduced dead time occurs the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained since it can be assumed that the opposite end is open lo2awezk 170912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 40 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting With the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle Dea...

Page 561: ...dition With 1 Pole Tripping And Implausible Circuit Breaker Condition With applications with 1 pole tripping during the dead time there is a plausibility check between the assigned trip command and the flow of electricity in the open conductor If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected pole selectively the plausibility check also occurs with the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts More...

Page 562: ...short circuit that led to the trip command is started The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3 pole tripping After expiration of the dead time the automatic reclosing function changes to the status Switch on Figure 7 42 shows the dead time logic 7 2 4 12 Protection and Automation Functions 7 2 Automatic Reclosing Function 562 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltag...

Page 563: ...parate dead time for faults begins with the stopping of the fault The total dead time is composed of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the 1st disruption plus the dead time for the evolving fault With the setting of the Dead time aft evolv fault to invalid no other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault The trip...

Page 564: ...ime a protection function configured for the automatic reclosing function start is picked up or if an external pickup is recognized through a binary input Binary input Evolving fault start The evolving fault detection can also be introduced through a binary input without an internal protection pickup being available Reaction to Evolving Faults After a recognized evolving fault the automatic reclos...

Page 565: ...h Evolving Faults in a 1 Pole Dead Time If due to an evolving fault there is a blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1 pole dead time without a protection function submitting a 3 pole trip command for example during an evolving fault detec tion with pickup the automatic reclosing function can create a 3 pole trip command Thus the circuit breaker will have 3 pole tripping in which the...

Page 566: ...ication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the circuit breaker The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time If a dead time prolonga tion is set the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation With the release of the closing indi cation the automatic reclosing function will switch to the reclaim time state loe...

Page 567: ...nctionality should be used here see Figure 7 47 You may only use the internal synchrocheck if the device is connected to a voltage transformer Alternatively you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit breaker readiness was positive The measuring request for the synchrocheck...

Page 568: ...decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs the currently running automatic reclosing cycle and thus the entire automatic reclosing was successful If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was not successful If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted one of these...

Page 569: ...s to the blocking of the automatic reclosing function This monitoring is optional and must be switched off through settings if the readiness signal is not available for the protection device Analysis of the circuit breaker readiness directly before the close command For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles it can be set whether the circuit breaker readiness is a requirement for the as...

Page 570: ...eaction to an evolving fault As the circuit breaker already has 1 pole open before the occurrence of an evolving fault the dead time is started if the circuit breaker is detected as having 3 poles open If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected the automatic reclosing function dead time will start with the dropout of the operate indication After a 1 pole trip a check is done durin...

Page 571: ...the static blocking Condition Indication Manual closing of the circuit breaker recognition through binary input or internal device control The blocking is temporary the duration can be set with the parameter Block time aft man close Inactive Circuit breaker not available for automatic reclosing function recognition through binary input This cause can be switched on or off through the parameter CB ...

Page 572: ...ing function start is available A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking Condition Indication If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released With operating modes with tripping If a 1 pole or 3 pole operate indication occurs during the automatic reclosing function start input however the auto matic re...

Page 573: ...Blk 1 pole AR Blk 3 pole AR Blk with 1 ph pickup Blk with 2 ph pickup Blk with 3 ph pickup Not ready Block by binary input If the maximum number of automatic reclosing attempts is reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Not ready Block by max cycles With operating modes with action time If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles expire without a trip command...

Page 574: ...re only possible for applica tions with a voltage transformer connection Another requirement is that the voltage of the line being switched on can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker This is only possible if the voltage trans former is aligned on the line side seen from the circuit breaker 7 2 4 18 Protection and Automation Functions 7 2 Automatic Reclosing Function 574 SIPROTEC 5 H...

Page 575: ...for the set duration Voltage supervision time Dead Line Check DLC If after switching off a short circuit the voltage on the switched off line does not disappear the automatic reclosing function can be avoided with the dead line check DLC The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase to ground voltages For the release of the close command with DLC the following conditions apply The automatic recl...

Page 576: ...ons Default Setting General _ 6601 1 General Mode off on test on _ 6601 101 General 79 operating mode with op w o act time with op with act time w pickup w o act time w pickup w action time with op with act time 7 2 4 19 Protection and Automation Functions 7 2 Automatic Reclosing Function 576 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 577: ... d t without Reduced dead t RDT Dead line check DLC without _ 6601 114 General Voltage supervi sion time 0 10 s to 30 00 s 0 10 s _ 6601 115 General Volt thres f live line bus 0 300 V to 340 000 V 48 000 V _ 6601 116 General Volt thres f dead line bus 0 300 V to 340 000 V 30 000 V Cycle 1 _ 6571 102 Cycle 1 Start from idle state allow no yes yes _ 6571 103 Cycle 1 Action time 0 00 s to 300 00 s 0 ...

Page 578: ...601 511 General Pickup 2ph for start SPS I _ 6601 512 General Pickup 3ph for start SPS I _ 6601 513 General Gen pickup for start SPS I _ 6601 514 General General trip for start SPS I _ 6601 515 General Trip pole A for start SPS I _ 6601 516 General Trip pole B for start SPS I _ 6601 517 General Trip pole C for start SPS I _ 6601 518 General Trip 1 pole for start SPS I _ 6601 519 General Trip 3 pol...

Page 579: ...ut SPS O _ 6601 328 General Blk by CB ready sup SPS O _ 6601 329 General Blk by strtsig superv SPS O _ 6601 330 General Blk by action time exp SPS O _ 6601 331 General Blk by max d t expiry SPS O _ 6601 332 General Blk by max d t delay SPS O _ 6601 333 General Blk by evolving fault SPS O _ 6601 337 General Block by no cycle SPS O _ 6601 338 General Block by protection SPS O _ 6601 334 General Blk ...

Page 580: ...ter successful reclosing the line A B from the busbar A will be set under voltage through the position I Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate voltage measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I I will be switched to the fault again At line end II now no healthy...

Page 581: ...sion time 0 10 s to 30 00 s 0 10 s _ 6601 115 General Volt thres f live line bus 0 300 V to 340 000 V 48 000 V ADT _ 6631 101 ADT 1 pole trip allowed no yes no _ 6631 104 ADT Action time 0 00 s to 300 00 s 0 20 s _ 6631 105 ADT Maximum dead time 0 50 s to 3000 00 s 5 00 s _ 6631 102 ADT CB ready check bef close no yes no _ 6631 103 ADT Synchroch aft 3 pole d t none internal external none _ 6631 10...

Page 582: ...79 state ENS O _ 6601 302 General Actual reclose cycle INS O _ 6601 303 General Not ready SPS O _ 6601 304 General 79 successful SPS O _ 6601 305 General CB ready superv expir SPS O _ 6601 306 General CB is not ready SPS O _ 6601 307 General 79 permits 1 pole trip SPS O _ 6601 308 General AR only after 1p trip SPS O _ 6601 309 General In progress SPS O _ 6601 310 General Reclaim time running SPS O...

Page 583: ...g SPS O _ 6631 302 ADT Stage release prot SPS O _ 6631 303 ADT Synchrocheck request SPS O Cooperation with External Automatic Reclosing Function Description The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function In this function mode the SIPROTEC protec tion functions create the trip co...

Page 584: ...e 1st reclosing cycle For applications with 1 pole tripping the external reclosing can provide the signal 1 pole trip permitted based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1 pole circuit breaker For applications with reclosing functions only with 1 pole faults and stage or zone releases through the reclosing function can the signal 1 pole AR only be connected The protection function...

Page 585: ...puts through which the external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function Configure the starting and blocking condition for the automatic reclosing function at the position shown in Figure 7 55 in DIGSI for example a protection function group Line is shown here or route the corresponding binary inputs scdigsia 080311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 55 Configuration o...

Page 586: ...protection stages that are configured through the automatic reclosing function start matrix The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs from the protection stages zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur after tripping Detailed information can be found in the chapter 7 2 4 1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function section Operating Mo...

Page 587: ...re thunderstorms and storms often occur a shorter reclaim time makes sense in order to minimize the danger of the final disconnection due to sequential lightning strikes or cable spark over Select a long reclaim time if there is no possibility for circuit breaker supervision with multiple automatic reclosing for example due to missing auxiliary contacts or lacking circuit breaker ready information...

Page 588: ...as no effect Default setting _ 6601 106 CB ready superv time 3 00 s With the CB ready superv time parameter you can determine after which maximum time after the tripping the circuit breaker must be ready for the reclosing function Set the time somewhat longer than the regeneration time of the circuit breaker after an OFF ON OFF cycle Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters...

Page 589: ...ns with 1 3 pole tripping Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is adequately interconnected If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path the setting with pickup may be better suitable With this setting you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1 pole in different conductors during evolving faults The consequence of this fault would be ...

Page 590: ...bfunctions RDT DLC or the ADT function If you do not use any of these functions the setting of this parameter is free to select Default setting _ 6601 114 Voltage supervision time 0 1 s With the Voltage supervision time parameter you can determine the measuring time that is available as a criteria for the voltage decision It should be longer than all transient oscillations through switching oper a...

Page 591: ...th the Volt thres f dead line bus parameter you can determine the limit voltage below which the line should be seen with certainty as idle or switched off The threshold value is used by the Dead line check subfunction dead line check The reference size is the phase to ground voltage You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 7 2 4 18 Dead Line Checking DLC and Reduced...

Page 592: ...meter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating mode with tripping Default setting _ 6571 108 Dead time aft 3 pole trip 0 5 s With this parameter Dead time aft 3 pole trip you can determine after which dead time the auto matic reclosing function will be executed After a 3 pole trip of the circuit breaker the system stability is priority Since the ...

Page 593: ...ose you can determine if after the expiration of the dead time meaning directly prior to assigning the close command readiness of the circuit breaker should be queried Parameter Value Description no With the setting no the automatic reclosing function does not check again the readiness of the circuit breaker prior to assigning the close demand Siemens recommends this setting if it is sufficient to...

Page 594: ...se command of the circuit breaker An external synchrocheck device initiates the synchrocheck The external synchrocheck device is connected with the binary signals Synchrocheck request and Release by ext sync Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapter 7 2 4 14 Closing Indication and Close Command under the section Synchrocheck Parameter Internal Synchrocheck These parameters ar...

Page 595: ... breaker in conjunction with busbar protection applications Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in the case of circuit breaker failure at the other line end Structure of the Function The External trip initiation function contains one stage You can instantiate the External trip initiation func tion in DIGSI 5 multiple times dwstrext 030211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 56 Structure Embedding o...

Page 596: ... the time of blocking it will be immediately reset However the operate indication remains stopped for the minimum operating time _ 102 Minimum operate time Application and Setting Notes Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Stage 1 _ 901 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 901 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 901 6 Stage 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 05 s 7 3 3 ...

Page 597: ...ge 1 Inactive SPS O _ 901 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 901 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 901 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 901 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 901 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O 7 3 6 Protection and Automation Functions 7 3 External Trip Initiation 3 Pole SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 597 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 598: ...ase advanced function type the following stages can be operated simul taneously Maximum of 4 stages Definite time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage User defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve In the Overcurrent protection phases basic function type the following stages can be operated simulta neously Maximum of 4 stages Defini...

Page 599: ...on function the stages can be stabilized against trip ping due to transformer inrush currents available in both function types Filter for RMS Value Gain Description The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means To gain harmonics in a defined way Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more than lower harmonics This is the case for reactors applied in A...

Page 600: ... value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes Otherwise the normal RMS value is used Functional Measured Values Values Description Primary Secondary Referenced to Iph A Gained RMS measured value of current A kA A Parameter Rated current Iph B Gained RMS measured value of current B kA A Parameter Rated ...

Page 601: ...ble in the SIPROTEC download area The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter The amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated by the filter To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device set the foll...

Page 602: ...Time Characteristic Curve Description Logic of the Basic Stage loocp3b1 280113 01 tif 3 en_US Figure 7 61 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 7 4 3 4 7 4 4 7 4 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 4 Overcurrent Protection Phases 602 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 603: ...CP_Adv_UMZ_StageControl 1 en_US Figure 7 62 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control Protection and Automation Functions 7 4 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 603 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 604: ... the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis RMS Value Selection Advanced Stage If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement Normal R...

Page 605: ... of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp the I0 elimination is applied The currents Iphx elim are available as functional values Pickup delay Advanced Stage If the current exceeds the threshold value the pickup delay is generated If the threshold remains exceeded during the pickup delay time the pickup signal is generated Dropout Delay Advanced Stage If the value falls below the dropou...

Page 606: ... this method as the standard method RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an overfunction For this method of measurement do not set the threshold value of the stage to less than 0 1 Irated sec If currents from mo...

Page 607: ...meter to 0 or to a low value Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis The following example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line EXAMPLE High current stage 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 cross section s length 60 km ZL s 0 46 Ω km Ratio of zero sequence impedance and positive sequence impedance of the line ZL0 ZL1 4 Sho...

Page 608: ...f Parameter Pickup delay Default setting _ 661 102 Pickup delay 0 00 s This parameter is not visible in the basic stage For special applications it is desirable that a short exceeding of the current threshold does not lead to the pickup of the stage and start fault logging and recording If this stage is used as a thermal overload function that is considered a special application When using the Pic...

Page 609: ...l central trip command control becomes involved Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 661 1 Definite T 1 Mode off on test off _ 661 2 Definite T 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 661 11 Definite T 1 1 pole operate allowed no yes no _ 661 26 Definite T 1 Dynamic settings no yes no _ 661 27 Definite T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 661 8 Definite T 1 Method ...

Page 610: ...0 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 661 21 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 661 31 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 661 38 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no ...

Page 611: ... to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn set bin input _ 661 34 Definite T 1 Effected by binary input no yes no _ 661 41 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 661 19 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005...

Page 612: ...settings SPS I _ 662 500 Definite T 2 Block delay op SPS I _ 662 54 Definite T 2 Inactive SPS O _ 662 52 Definite T 2 Behavior ENS O _ 662 53 Definite T 2 Health ENS O _ 662 60 Definite T 2 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 662 62 Definite T 2 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 662 63 Definite T 2 Dyn set AR cycle2act SPS O _ 662 64 Definite T 2 Dyn set AR cycle3act SPS O _ 662 65 Definite T 2 Dyn set ARcyc...

Page 613: ... loocp3b2 280113 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 65 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 7 4 5 7 4 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 4 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 613 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 614: ... Stage Control loocp3p2 310511 01 tif 4 en_US Figure 7 67 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Advanced Protection and Automation Functions 7 4 Overcurrent Protection Phases 614 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 615: ...weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x threshold value the dropout is started The pickup will be indicated as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can select between instantaneous dropout totalized time is deleted or dropout according to the characteristic curv...

Page 616: ...mine the I0 elimination of the phase currents the transformer neutral point current IY must be measured dwsgaocp 230414 01 1 en_US Figure 7 69 I0 Elimination Principle In case of an I0 elimination the following calculations must be considered IA elim IA 1 3 IY IB elim IB 1 3 IY IC elim IC 1 3 IY The phase current Iphx elim is necessary for the following protection process If the Method of measurem...

Page 617: ...MS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an overfunction For this method of measurement do not set the threshold value of the stage to less than 0 1 Irated sec If currents from more than one measuring point are added...

Page 618: ... character curve parameters for the specific application The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current Pickup by overload must be excluded since overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short circuit protection and not as overload protection Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx 10 for transformers and motors to approx 20 above the maximum expected lo...

Page 619: ... the time direction The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time grading schedule that has been prepared for the electrical power system Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required leave the param eter Time dial at 1 default setting Parameter Reset Default setting _ 691 131 Reset disk emulation With the Reset parameter you defin...

Page 620: ... s _ 691 130 Inverse T 1 Type of char acter curve _ 691 113 Inverse T 1 Min time of the curve 0 00 s to 1 00 s 0 00 s _ 691 131 Inverse T 1 Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 691 101 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 _ 691 115 Inverse T 1 Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 691 28 Inverse T 1 Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 691 35 Invers...

Page 621: ...0 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 691 104 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s AR cycle 3 _ 691 32 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle gr 3 no yes no _ 691 39 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 691 17 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175...

Page 622: ... Behavior ENS O _ 691 53 Inverse T 1 Health ENS O _ 691 60 Inverse T 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 691 62 Inverse T 1 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 691 63 Inverse T 1 Dyn set AR cycle2act SPS O _ 691 64 Inverse T 1 Dyn set AR cycle3act SPS O _ 691 65 Inverse T 1 Dyn set ARcycl 3act SPS O _ 691 66 Inverse T 1 Dyn set CLP active SPS O _ 691 67 Inverse T 1 Dyn set BI active SPS O _ 691 68 Inverse T ...

Page 623: ...d as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can select between instantaneous dropout totalized time is deleted or dropout according to the characteristic curve reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve The dropout according to characteristic curve disk emulation is the same as turning back a rotor disk The weighted reduction of the time i...

Page 624: ...ld value Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1 00 in order to obtain a simple relation You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve Set the time value in seconds The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter i i NOTE The value pairs must be entered in continuous order Parameter Time dial Default setting...

Page 625: ...trip logic of the Circuit breaker function group is always 3 pole because the device does not support phase selective tripping Parameter Threshold absolute Default setting _ 113 Threshold absolute 0 000 A With the Threshold absolute parameter you define and change the absolute pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve The parameter is only used for speci...

Page 626: ... by AR off n ready no yes no _ 35 User curve Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 29 User curve Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 36 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 14 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600...

Page 627: ..._ 105 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s Cold load PU _ 33 User curve Effect b cold load pickup no yes no _ 40 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 18 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 I...

Page 628: ...nternal Inrush Current Detection Description With the Blk w inrush curr detect parameter you can define whether tripping of the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current In case of a blocking the stage picks up The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked The function signals this through a corresponding indication If the blocking drops ...

Page 629: ...The trans former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans mittable short circuit current yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that would lead to a tripping of the stage the start of the time delay and tripping of the stage are blocked Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of the stage is set below ...

Page 630: ...generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent protection stage or block it if required In the latter case the settings of the Threshold and Operate delay parameters are of no relevance Within the overcurrent protection stage each of these signals is provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function and its own dynamic settings Operate delay and Th...

Page 631: ...ly This means that a signal with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3 The settings assigned to signal 2 become active The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled In this case the settings assigned to the signals are not visible and are without effect Link to the Device Internal Function Automatic Reclosing Advanced Stage loocp3awe 040311 01 1 en_US Figure 7 73 Influence of the AREC...

Page 632: ... 1 en_US Figure 7 74 Influence of the Cold Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent Protection Stage In the case of cold load pickup you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the protection level You can also block the level To do so you must activate the influ ence of the cold load pickup You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or as...

Page 633: ...n they become active they switch to the assigned dynamic settings The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals sources of influence are set to the time delay 0 instantaneous tripping The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1 5 A If the threshold value 1 5 A is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2 the overcur...

Page 634: ...g stages can be operated simultaneously Maximum of 3 stages Definite time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection In the function type Overcurrent protection ground basic the following stages can be operated simultane ously Maximum of 3 stages Definite time overcurrent protection basic 1 s...

Page 635: ...ffected by an external source via a binary input signal Automatic reclosing AREC Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal If the device is equipped with an Inrush current detection function the stages can be stabilized against trip ping due to transformer inrush currents available in both function types General Functionality Description Measured Value Selection The function provides the opti...

Page 636: ...N A 0 002 A to 8 000 A IN meas ured 4 Protec tion 0 010 A to 35 000 A N A N A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 4 Meas urement 0 001 A to 1 600 A N A N A 0 002 A to 8 000 A 3ph IN separate 3I0 calcu lated 4 Protec tion 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 3 Protec tion 1 sen 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 4 Meas urement ...

Page 637: ...calculated zero sequence current 3I0 This setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N 51N function for safety reasons Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 9 General Measured value 3I0 calculated IN measured IN measured 7 5 3 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 637 C530...

Page 638: ... loocpgb1 060213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 79 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 7 5 4 7 5 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground 638 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 639: ... Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Protection and Automation Functions ...

Page 640: ...n the device the following functions can influence the overcurrent protection stages Automatic reclosing Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 7 5 8 1 Description Application and Setting Notes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 751 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With the Method...

Page 641: ...es in the case of very long lines with low source impedance or ahead of high reactances for example transformers shunt reactors Set the Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short circuit at the end of the line Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis The following e...

Page 642: ...ctromechanical relay must be known for this purpose Subtract the dropout time of your own device see Technical Data and set the result Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 751 4 Dropout ratio 0 95 This parameter is not visible in the basic stage The recommended set value of 0 95 is appropriate for most applications To achieve high precision measurements the setting value of the para...

Page 643: ..._ 751 14 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 751 20 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn set AR cycle 2 _ 751 30 Definite T 1 Effected by AR c...

Page 644: ...s 0 30 s Dyn s Cold load PU _ 751 33 Definite T 1 Effect b cold load pickup no yes no _ 751 40 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 751 18 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 ...

Page 645: ...00 s 0 00 s _ 752 6 Definite T 2 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 752 28 Definite T 2 Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 752 35 Definite T 2 Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 752 29 Definite T 2 Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 752 36 Definite T 2 Stage blocked no yes no _ 752 14 Definite T 2 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Ira...

Page 646: ... 3 _ 752 32 Definite T 2 Effected by AR cycle gr 3 no yes no _ 752 39 Definite T 2 Stage blocked no yes no _ 752 17 Definite T 2 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 752 23 De...

Page 647: ... Operate ACT O Definite T 1 _ 751 81 Definite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 751 84 Definite T 1 Activ dyn settings SPS I _ 751 500 Definite T 1 Block delay op SPS I _ 751 54 Definite T 1 Inactive SPS O _ 751 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 751 53 Definite T 1 Health ENS O _ 751 60 Definite T 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 751 62 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 751 63 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR ...

Page 648: ... Stage lo_ocp_gr2 4 en_US Figure 7 81 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 7 5 5 7 5 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground 648 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 649: ...t is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x threshold value the dropout is started The pickup will be indicated as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can select ...

Page 650: ...tal comp or the calculated RMS value Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis ...

Page 651: ...amental comp Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks are to be suppressed Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an ove...

Page 652: ...lt setting _ 781 101 Time dial 1 With the Time dial parameter you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time grading schedule that has been prepared for the electrical power system Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode shorter time delays might be reasonable one grading time above fast tripping since t...

Page 653: ... s 0 00 s _ 781 109 Inverse T 1 Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 781 101 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 _ 781 115 Inverse T 1 Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 781 28 Inverse T 1 Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 781 35 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 781 29 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 781...

Page 654: ...verse T 1 Effected by AR cycle gr 3 no yes no _ 781 39 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 781 17 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 781 105 Inverse T 1 Time d...

Page 655: ...e T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 781 53 Inverse T 1 Health ENS O _ 781 60 Inverse T 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 781 62 Inverse T 1 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 781 63 Inverse T 1 Dyn set AR cycle2act SPS O _ 781 64 Inverse T 1 Dyn set AR cycle3act SPS O _ 781 65 Inverse T 1 Dyn set ARcycl 3act SPS O _ 781 66 Inverse T 1 Dyn set CLP active SPS O _ 781 67 Inverse T 1 Dyn set BI active SPS O _ 781 68 Inver...

Page 656: ...d as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can select between instantaneous dropout totalized time is deleted or dropout according to the characteristic curve reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve The dropout according to characteristic curve disk emulation is the same as turning back a rotor disk The weighted reduction of the time i...

Page 657: ...ld value Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1 00 in order to obtain a simple relation You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve Set the time value in seconds The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter i i NOTE The value pairs must be entered in continuous order Parameter Time dial Default setting...

Page 658: ...on in Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User Defined Characteristic Curve Page 656 Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 1 User curve Mode off on test off _ 2 User curve Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 26 User curve Dynamic settings no yes no _ 27 User curve Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 8 User curve Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fund...

Page 659: ... A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 103 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 31 User curve Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 38 User curve Stage blocked no yes ...

Page 660: ...ut no yes no _ 41 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 19 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 107 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Infor...

Page 661: ...s out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded the time delay is started After that time the stage operates The following figure only shows the part of the stage exemplified by definite time overcurrent protection stage 1 that illustrates the influence of the inrush current detection Only if the central function Inrush current detection see section 11 12 Inrush Current Detection is i...

Page 662: ...pping of the stage the start of the time delay and tripping of the stage are blocked Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans former This applies to the overcurrent protection stage which is used as a backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the transformer Influe...

Page 663: ...ercurrent protection stage each of these signals is provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function and its own dynamic settings Operate delay and Threshold The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not If one of these signals for example signal function x becomes active and is to...

Page 664: ...s can be disabled In this case the settings assigned to the signals are not visible and are without effect Link to the Device Internal Function Automatic Reclosing Advanced Stage loocpgrnd 040311 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 7 87 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent Protection Stage Protection and Automation Functions 7 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground 664 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controlle...

Page 665: ...en_US Figure 7 88 Influence of the Cold Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent Protection Stage You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection stage for a cold load pickup You can also block the stage To do so you must activate the influence of the cold load pickup You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to S...

Page 666: ...age When they become active they switch to the assigned dynamic settings The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals sources of influence are set to the time delay 0 instantaneous tripping The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1 5 A If the threshold value 1 5 A is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2 the ...

Page 667: ...feed at one end Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring topologies Structure of the Function Stage Control Description Logic The following figure represents the stage control It applies to all types of stages lodocp32 190111 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 90 Stage Control Logic Diagram 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 3 7 6 3 1 Protection and Automat...

Page 668: ...which links in the tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker The Blk by meas volt failure parameter can be set so that measuring voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it Application and Setting Notes Parameter Blk by meas volt failure Recommended setting value _ 8131 10 Blk by meas volt failure yes You use the Blk by meas volt failure parameter to control the behav...

Page 669: ...0213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 91 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 7 6 4 7 6 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 669 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 670: ...termination itself works across stages see section 7 6 7 1 Description Non Directional Pickup Voltage Memory Basic and Advanced Stage If a 3 phase close up fault occurs all 3 phase to ground voltages drop to almost 0 If this happens direction determination can fall back on a voltage memory see chapter l7 6 7 1 Description If no voltage measure Protection and Automation Functions 7 6 Directional Ov...

Page 671: ...nent numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Dropout Delay Advanced Stage If the value falls below the dropout threshold the dropout can be delayed The pickup is maintained for the specified time The tripping delay continues...

Page 672: ... up in the current interface of a function group the setting value should not be set lower than 0 1 Irated sec multiplied by the number of added currents Parameter Directional comparison Release via input signal Default setting _ 8131 104 Directional comparison no Default setting _ 8131 106 Release via input signal no These 2 parameters are not visible in the basic stage You use these parameters t...

Page 673: ...fast tripping since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function fails Typical examples of grading times are provided in the chapters 7 6 9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and 7 6 10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 8131 4 Dropout ratio 0 95 This parameter is not visible in the basic stage The recom...

Page 674: ...6 Definite T 1 Dynamic settings no yes no _ 8131 27 Definite T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 8131 3 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8131 4 Def...

Page 675: ...0 s Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 8131 31 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 8131 38 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 8131 16 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8...

Page 676: ...00 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8131 25 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s General _ 8132 1 Definite T 2 Mode off on test off _ 8132 2 Definite T 2 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 8132 105 Definite T 2 Directional mode forward reverse forward _ 8132 8 Definite T 2 Meth...

Page 677: ... A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 10 000 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 10 000 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 2 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 10 000 A _ 8132 20 Definite T 2 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Dyn set AR cycle 2 _ 8132 30 Definite T 2 Effected by AR cycle 2 no yes no _ 8132 37 Definite T 2 Stage blocked no yes no _...

Page 678: ...8132 33 Definite T 2 Effect b cold load pickup no yes no _ 8132 40 Definite T 2 Stage blocked no yes no _ 8132 18 Definite T 2 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 10 000 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 10 000 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 2 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 10 000 A _ 81...

Page 679: ... Dyn set BI active SPS O _ 8131 68 Definite T 1 Dyn set blks pickup SPS O _ 8131 55 Definite T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 8131 300 Definite T 1 Direction ACD O _ 8131 56 Definite T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 8131 57 Definite T 1 Operate ACT O Definite T 2 _ 8132 81 Definite T 2 Block stage SPS I _ 8132 501 Definite T 2 Release delay op SPS I _ 8132 84 Definite T 2 Activ dyn settings SPS I _ 8132 500 De...

Page 680: ...Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Description Logic of the Basic Stage lodoci6b 060213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 93 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 7 6 5 7 6 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Phases 680 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 681: ...6 7 1 Description Non Directional Pickup Voltage Memory Basic and Advanced Stage If a 3 phase close up fault occurs all 3 phase to ground voltages drop to almost 0 If this happens direction determination can fall back on a voltage memory see chapter 7 6 7 1 Description If no voltage measure ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory the basic stage Prote...

Page 682: ...ve is processed An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the characteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x t...

Page 683: ...ectional mode forward You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage Parameter Value Description forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction in the direc tion of the line reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction in the direc tion of the busbar Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting val...

Page 684: ...pty Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non directional manner if the voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed at low voltages 3 phase close up fault An empty voltage memory may exist for example if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the CB trips Siemens recommends using the default setting no Select this setting if determining of dir...

Page 685: ...for the electrical power system Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode shorter time delays might be reasonable one grading time above fast tripping since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function fails Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required leave the Time dial parameter at 1 default setting Parameter Reset ...

Page 686: ... Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8341 130 Inverse T 1 Type of char acter curve _ 8341 114 Inverse T 1 Min time of the curve 0 00 s to 1 00 s 0 00 s _ 8341 131 Inverse T 1 Reset instantaneo...

Page 687: ... 38 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 8341 16 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8341 104 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s AR cycle 3 _ 8341 32...

Page 688: ... General Activation emg mode SPS I _ 2311 501 General Test of direction SPS I _ 2311 300 General Emergency mode act SPS O _ 2311 301 General Test direction ACD O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Inverse T 1 _ 8161 81 Inverse T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 8161 501 Inverse T 1 Release delay op SPS I _ 8161 84 Inverse T 1 Activ dyn settings SPS I _ 81...

Page 689: ...is processed An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the char acteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x t...

Page 690: ... dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time grading chart that has been prepared for the electrical power system Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required leave the Time dial parameter set to 1 Parameter Reset Default setting _ 115 Reset disk emulation...

Page 691: ...s _ 26 User curve Dynamic settings no yes no _ 27 User curve Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 3 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 115 User curve Reset ...

Page 692: ..._ 38 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 16 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 7 500 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 104 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s AR cycle 3 _ 32 User curve...

Page 693: ...0 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type User curve _ 81 User curve Block stage SPS I _ 501 User curve Release delay op SPS I _ 84 User curve Activ dyn settings SPS I _ 500 User curve Block delay op SPS I _ 54 User curve Inactive SPS O _ 52 User curve Behavior ENS O _ 53 User curve Health ENS O _ 60 User curve Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 62 User curve Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS ...

Page 694: ...or 2 phase fault occurs close up fault The phase to phase voltages are calculated when phase to ground voltages are connected The cross polarized voltage reference voltage is vertical in relation to the short circuit voltages for 1 phase to ground faults Figure 7 97 left For 2 phase short circuits the position of the reference voltages changes up to 30o depending on the extent to which the short c...

Page 695: ... rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short circuit current Consequently the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible Figure 7 98 illustrates the relationship based on a 1 phase ground fault in phase A The short circuit current IscA lags the short circuit voltage by the short circuit angle φsc The reference voltage in this case VBC for measuring element A is rot...

Page 696: ...o position the reference voltage as it ensures a reliable directional result Some example settings for special applications appear in the following Table 7 3 Please note that for phase to ground faults PG faults the reference voltage fault free voltage is vertical in relation to the short circuit voltage This results in the following setting for the rotation angle Rotation angle of ref volt 90 φsh...

Page 697: ... parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end see Figure 7 100 if there is no directional measuring element a fault on feeder T1 will also trip the other feeder T2 In contrast a directional measuring element in the devices on busbar B prevents the tripping of the circuit breaker in the parallel feeder Therefore in Figure 7 100 directional overcurrent protection is used in the places marke...

Page 698: ...d between them A directional definite time overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the forward direction 1st level However this level is not enabled in the idle state The level is only released when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end If the enabled level also defines the fault in the forward direction the fault must be on this line ...

Page 699: ...delay the stage typically by 100 ms so that the blocking signal is received in time under all circum stances It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the event of failure followed by a system incident Configuration of the Stage Function Chart To configure the stage proceed as follows The Directional mode parameter of both stages must be set to forwar...

Page 700: ... protection advanced stages 1 Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced stage 1 Logarithmic inverse time overcurrent protection stage 1 Logarithmic inverse time with knee point overcurrent protection stage 1 User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage In the basic function type Directional overcurrent protection ground basic the following stages can operate simultaneously A m...

Page 701: ...fluence the pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages The stage can also be affected by an external source via a binary input signal Automatic reclosing AREC Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal If the device is equipped with the Inrush current detection function the stages can be stabilized against operate due to transformer inrush currents Protection and Automa...

Page 702: ...eshold Setting Range rated I sec ph 5 A IN 5 A 3ph IN 3I0 calculated 4 Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A N A N A 0 15 A to 175 00 A 4 Measurement 0 001 A to 1 600 A N A N A 0 005 A to 8 000 A IN measured 4 Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A N A N A 0 15 A to 175 00 A 4 Measurement 0 001 A to 1 600 A N A N A 0 005 A to 8 000 A 3ph IN separate 3I0 calculated 4 Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 030 A to 35 0...

Page 703: ...240812 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 7 106 Measured Value Definition Start of the Direction Determination If the zero sequence current 3I0 exceeds the pickup threshold of a stage and the selected voltage V0 or V2 exceeds the parameter Min voltage V0 or V2 as well the direction determination is started Direction Determination with Zero Sequence Values The direction is determined by calculating the phase an...

Page 704: ...3 2 en_US Figure 7 107 Rotation of the Reference Voltage Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground Function with Zero Sequence Values The rotated reference voltage Vref rot and the parameter Forward section define the forward and reverse ranges see Figure 7 108 The forward range is calculated as Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref rot Δφ is set with the parameter Forward section If the sh...

Page 705: ... the secon dary rated values of phase current and voltage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Measured value Recommended setting value _ 9 Measured value IN Measured This parameter is not available in the basic function Parameter Value Description IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN This is the recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the c...

Page 706: ... volt Forward section Recommended setting value _ 2311 102 Rotation angle of ref volt 45 Recommended setting value _ 2311 103 Forward section 88 The parameter Forward section is not available in the basic function The basic function uses a fixed value of 88 The direction characteristic that is the area of the forward and reverse ranges is set with the Rotation angle of ref volt and the Forward sec...

Page 707: ...le zero sequence impedance conditions or that a parallel line influences the zero sequence system Input Signal Test of direction If you activate the binary input signal Test of direction the direction is determined and indicated even without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages This provides an easy means of checking the direction during commissioning without changing the thre...

Page 708: ...available for the stage From an internal source on the pickup of the Measuring voltage failure detection function From an external source via the binary input signal Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker which links to the trip of the voltage transformer circuit breaker The Blk by meas volt failure parameter can be set to either block or not block the stage when the Measur...

Page 709: ...er is connected to the voltage transformer circuit breaker Parameter Value Description yes The directional overcurrent protection stage is blocked when a measuring voltage failure is detected Siemens recommends using the default setting as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring voltage failure occurs no The directional overcurrent protection stage is not blocked when a...

Page 710: ...812 02 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 110 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 7 7 5 7 7 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 710 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 711: ... as a criterion for the ground fault Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I 3ph the zero sequence current is measured or calculated Depending on the applied CT terminal type the 3I0 Threshold range varies according to the following table Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manu...

Page 712: ...age The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely Externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage see chapter 7 7 4 1 Description Measuring voltage failure see chapter 7 7 4 1 Description Via the dynamic settings functionality only available in the advanced function type see Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 7 7 10 Influence of Other Func...

Page 713: ... parameter to define the directional mode of the stage Parameter Value Description forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction in the direction of the line reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction in the direction of the busbar Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 4861 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With ...

Page 714: ...l functions is not necessary yes If a device internal function Automatic reclosing or Cold load pickup detection or an external function should affect the overcurrent protection stage such as change the setting of the threshold value or operate delay blocking of the stage the setting must be changed to yes This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing Cold load PU Binary input...

Page 715: ...ropout ratio parameter This avoids chattering of the stage Parameter Dropout delay Recommended setting value _ 4861 101 Dropout delay 0 s This parameter is not visible for the basic stage Siemens recommends using the dropout delay of 0 s since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as fast as possible You can use the Dropout delay parameter 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if ...

Page 716: ... Dropout delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 4861 6 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 4861 28 Definite T 1 Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 4861 35 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 4861 29 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 4861 36 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4861 14 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030...

Page 717: ...61 32 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle gr 3 no yes no _ 4861 39 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4861 17 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 4861 23 Defin...

Page 718: ...ite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 4861 501 Definite T 1 Release delay op SPS I _ 4861 84 Definite T 1 Activ dyn settings SPS I _ 4861 500 Definite T 1 Block delay op SPS I _ 4861 54 Definite T 1 Inactive SPS O _ 4861 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 4861 53 Definite T 1 Health ENS O _ 4861 60 Definite T 1 Inrush blocks operate SPS O _ 4861 62 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 4861 63 Definite T ...

Page 719: ...812 02 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 112 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 7 7 6 7 7 6 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 719 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 720: ...as a criterion for the ground fault Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I 3ph the zero sequence current is measured or calculated Depending on the applied CT terminal type the 3I0 Threshold range varies according to the following table Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 720 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller M...

Page 721: ...ic and Advanced Stage When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1 1 the inverse time characteristic curve is processed An integrated measuring procedure totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the characteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exc...

Page 722: ...e Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function Basic and Advanced Stage Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device internal Inrush current detection function is described in chapter Blocking of the Tripping by Device Internal Inrush Current Detection For more information refer to 7 5 7 1 Description Directional ...

Page 723: ... are to be suppressed Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an overfunction For this method of measurement do not set the threshold value of the stage t...

Page 724: ... the stage the setting must be changed to yes This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing Cold load PU Binary input as well as the dynamic settings Threshold Time dial and Stage blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the specific influence For further setting notes refer to chapter 7 5 8 2 Application and Setting Notes Advanced Stage of the func ...

Page 725: ...me Parameter Additional time delay Default setting _ 4891 115 Additional time delay 0 00 s With the parameter Additional time delay you define a definite time delay in addition to the inverse time delay If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s this parameter has no effect on the inverse time characteristic curve This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes Fo...

Page 726: ...orward reverse forward _ 4891 8 Inverse T 1 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 4891 110 Inverse T 1 Directional comparison no yes no _ 4891 112 Inverse T 1 Release via input signal no yes no _ 4891 10 Inverse T 1 Blk by meas volt failure no yes yes _ 4891 26 Inverse T 1 Dynamic settings no yes no _ 4891 27 Inverse T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 4891 3 Inv...

Page 727: ...A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 4891 103 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 4891 31 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 4891 38 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4891 16 I...

Page 728: ... T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4891 19 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 4891 107 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data ...

Page 729: ..._ 4891 59 Inverse T 1 Disk emulation running SPS O _ 4891 55 Inverse T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 4891 300 Inverse T 1 Direction ACD O _ 4891 56 Inverse T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 4891 57 Inverse T 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 729 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 730: ...Apart from the operate curve this type of stage is identical to the Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced stage see chapter 7 7 6 1 Description This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve For further functionality refer to chapter 7 7 6 1 Description 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 730 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage...

Page 731: ...e charac teristic curve At high currents the Min time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit dwloginv 300913 3 en_US Figure 7 116 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse Time Characteristic The time to operate is calculated with the following formula fomula01 240812 01 tif 1 en_US Where Tmax Maximum time of the curve parameter Max time of the curve Td Time dial parameter Time dial Top ...

Page 732: ... the application EXAMPLE Threshold Secondary current Ithresh 1 2 A Threshold multiplier Imul 1 1 Pickup value Secondary current IPU 1 2 A 1 1 1 32 A Dynamic Settings Time dial Default setting _ 6 Time dial 1 250 s You can use the Time dial parameter to change the slope of the characteristic curve General information cannot be provided Define the value corresponding to the application Parameter Max...

Page 733: ...15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 6 Log inv T Time dial 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 250 s _ 113 Log inv T Min time of the curve 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 200 s _ 114 Log inv T Max time of the curve 0 000 s to 60 000 s 5 800 s _ 116 Log inv T Threshold ...

Page 734: ... _ 38 Log inv T Stage blocked no yes no _ 16 Log inv T Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 109 Log inv T Time dial 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 250 s Dyn s AR cycle 3 _ 32 Log inv T...

Page 735: ...5 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 112 Log inv T Time dial 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 250 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Log inv T _ 81 Log inv T Block stage I _ 501 Log inv T Release delay op I _ 84 Log inv T Activ dyn settings I _ 500 Log inv T Block delay op I _ 54 Log inv T Inactive O _ 52 Log inv T Behavior O _ 53 Log inv T Health O _ 60 Log inv T Inrush blocks operate O _ 62 Log inv...

Page 736: ...ical to the Inverse time overcurrent protec tion advanced stage see chapter 7 7 6 1 Description The only difference is that the dynamic settings change functionality is not available This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve For further functionality refer to chapter 7 7 6 1 Description 7 7 8 7 7 8 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Groun...

Page 737: ...rrent at Min time determines the current value at Min time of the curve The parameter Time dial servers as a time factor to the operate time dwloinkn 300913 3 en_US Figure 7 118 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee Point Characteristic In the Example of Threshold 0 004 A Application and Setting Notes Apart from the operate curve this type of stage is almost identical to the Inve...

Page 738: ...eral information cannot be provided Define the value corresponding to the application Parameter Maximum Time of the Operate Curve Default setting _ 103 Max time of the curve 93 00 s You can use the parameter Max time of the curve to determine the initial value of the operate curve for 3I0 Threshold General information cannot be provided Define the value corresponding to the application Settings Ad...

Page 739: ...00 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 104 Log inv T KP Min time of the curve 0 00 s to 30 00 s 0 80 s _ 103 Log inv T KP Max time of the curve 0 00 s to 200 00 s 93 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Typ...

Page 740: ...s the Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced stage see chapter 7 7 6 1 Description The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve For further functionality refer to chapter 7 7 6 1 Description 7 7 9 7 7 9 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 740 SIPROTEC 5 High Volt...

Page 741: ...teristic curve disk emulation is the same as turning back a rotor disk The weighted reduction of the time is started from 0 9 of the set threshold value The following figure shows the pickup behavior and dropout behavior when a directional user defined charac teristic curve is used dwpidrbe 300913 1 en_US Figure 7 120 Pickup and Dropout Behaviors when Using a User Defined Characteristic Curve i i ...

Page 742: ...urve behavior of a disk emulation rotor disk or instantaneously Parameter Value Description disk emulation Both operate curve and a dropout characteristic curve have to be specified with this setting Use this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical devices or other devices performing dropout after disk emulation instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be perform...

Page 743: ... 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 110 User curve Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 101 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 28 User curve Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 35 User curve Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 29 User curve Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 36 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 14 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to ...

Page 744: ..._ 39 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 17 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 105 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s Cold load PU _ 33 User curve Eff...

Page 745: ...User curve Inrush blocks operate SPS O _ 62 User curve Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 63 User curve Dyn set AR cycle2act SPS O _ 64 User curve Dyn set AR cycle3act SPS O _ 65 User curve Dyn set ARcycl 3act SPS O _ 66 User curve Dyn set CLP active SPS O _ 67 User curve Dyn set BI active SPS O _ 68 User curve Dyn set blks pickup SPS O _ 59 User curve Disk emulation running SPS O _ 55 User curve Pickup...

Page 746: ...on stage In the function type Overcurrent protection 1 phase advanced the following stages can be operated simultaneously Maximum of 3 stages Definite time overcurrent protection UMZ 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent protection AMZ 1 stage User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection 1 Fast stage In the function type Overcurrent protection 1 phase basic the following stages can operate ...

Page 747: ... the Function Overcurrent Protection 1 Phase Basic If the device is equipped with the Inrush current detection function you can stabilize the stages against issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush currents Protection and Automation Functions 7 8 Overcurrent Protection 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 747 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 748: ... Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis 7 8 3 7 8 3 1 Protection and Automat...

Page 749: ...u connect protection function groups in the DIGSI 5 Project Tree Name of the device Function group connections Related Topics 7 4 7 1 Description Application and Setting Notes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 12661 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With the Method of measurement parameter you define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp standard method or th...

Page 750: ...2662 27 Definite T 2 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 12662 8 Definite T 2 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 12662 3 Definite T 2 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated...

Page 751: ...SPS I _ 12662 500 Definite T 2 Block delay op SPS I _ 12662 54 Definite T 2 Inactive SPS O _ 12662 52 Definite T 2 Behavior ENS O _ 12662 53 Definite T 2 Health ENS O _ 12662 60 Definite T 2 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 12662 55 Definite T 2 Pickup ACD O _ 12662 56 Definite T 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 12662 57 Definite T 2 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 8 Overcurrent Pr...

Page 752: ...at is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x threshold value the dropout is started The pickup will be indicated as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can select...

Page 753: ...inrush current In case of a blocking the stage picks up The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked The function signals this through a corresponding indi cation If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded the time delay is started When complete the stage generates an operate indication Blocking of tripping with the Inrush current detecti...

Page 754: ...p at approx 10 above the Threshold Parameter Time dial Default setting _ 12691 101 Time dial 1 Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required leave the param eter Time dial at 1 default setting Parameter Reset Default setting _ 12691 109 Reset disk emulation You use t...

Page 755: ...12691 59 Inverse T 1 Disk emulation running SPS O _ 12691 55 Inverse T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 12691 56 Inverse T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 12691 57 Inverse T 1 Operate ACT O Stage with User Defined Characteristic Curve Description The User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func tion type This stage is structured the same way as the stage wi...

Page 756: ...acteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest characteristic curve point Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic curve point do not reduce the operate time The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest characteristic curve point Application and Setting Notes This stage is structured the same way as the sta...

Page 757: ...ent time value pairs of the dropout characteristic curve Use these settings to define the characteristic curve Set a current time value pair for each characteristic curve point The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1 00 in order to obtain a simple rela...

Page 758: ...urve Block delay op SPS I _ 54 User curve Inactive SPS O _ 52 User curve Behavior ENS O _ 53 User curve Health ENS O _ 60 User curve Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 59 User curve Disk emulation running SPS O _ 55 User curve Pickup ACD O _ 56 User curve Operate delay expired ACT O _ 57 User curve Operate ACT O 7 8 5 4 Protection and Automation Functions 7 8 Overcurrent Protection 1 Phase 758 SIPROTEC...

Page 759: ...stems Instantaneous high current tripping The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage selective pickup and operate indications of the functions listed above see also Figure 7 126 Pickup Operate The pickup and operate indications are output where present with direction information loocgrin 240112 01 tif 3 en_US Figure 7 126 Logic Diagram of the Ove...

Page 760: ...and the functions that are to be blocked If the parameter is set to yes the connection is effective A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for synchronization of the internal measurement methods The jump detection reacts to changes in the current The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an internal pickup of the protecti...

Page 761: ...d for each of the phase currents IA IB and IC and the quotient I2nd harm I1st harm is formed from this If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value a phase selective signal is issued If 95 of the set threshold value is exceeded this leads to a pickup reset dropout ratio 0 95 Protection and Automation Functions 7 10 Inrush Current Detection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 761 C530...

Page 762: ...eously The following figure shows a typical inrush current characteristic with the simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable dwinru03 240211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 130 Inrush Current Characteristic The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method From the present fundamental component current 1st harmonic the threshold value for identification of the flat areas is der...

Page 763: ... of threshold value violation a blocking indication for all 3 phase currents and the measured or calculated zero sequence current l2nd harm l1st harm The crossblock func tion works via a timer Set parameters for the time depending on the expected duration factor via the param eter Cross blocking time If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat range limit Imax the inrush cu...

Page 764: ...o be greater than the RMS value of the maximum inrush current of the transformer A practicable value is 7 5 times the transformer rated current Parameter Blocking with CWA Recommended setting value _ 111 Blocking with CWA yes Parameter Value Description yes CWA process activated no CWA process deactivated Parameter Blocking with 2 harmonic Recommended setting value _ 110 Blocking with 2 harmonic y...

Page 765: ...blocking time Default setting _ 109 Cross blocking time 0 06 s You define the duration of this blocking with the Cross blocking time parameter The default setting of 0 06 s about 3 periods has proven practicable Set the time as short as possible and check the value during the closure trials The parameter Cross blocking time is inactive at Cross blocking no Parameter Start flt rec Default setting _...

Page 766: ... blocking no yes no _ 109 Inrush detect Cross blocking time 0 03 s to 200 00 s 0 06 s _ 114 Inrush detect Start flt rec no yes yes Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inrush detect _ 81 Inrush detect Block stage SPS I _ 54 Inrush detect Inactive SPS O _ 52 Inrush detect Behavior ENS O _ 53 Inrush detect Health ENS O _ 300 Inrush detect 2 harmonic phase A SPS O _ 301 Inrush detect ...

Page 767: ...neous high current tripping function offers 2 different increment types Stage with standard release method Stage with release method via protection interface only applicable if the device is equipped with a protection interface The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory set dwihcstr 230211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 133 Structure Embedding of the Function 7 11 7 11 1 7 ...

Page 768: ...the circuit breaker is being closed or if the binary input signal release is active The way signals are gener ated Rel by CB switch on is described in section 5 5 8 Circuit Breaker Position Recognition for Protec tion Related Auxiliary Functions always active The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and of the binary input signal release only wi...

Page 769: ...with binary signal Select this setting to release the stage via an external signal Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 3901 3 Threshold 10 0 A for Irated 1 A or 50 0 A for Irated 5 A The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers For this reason set the Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage Thus use this stage only if current...

Page 770: ...he line impedance have extremely different angles Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 3901 4 Dropout ratio 0 90 The recommended setting value of 0 90 is sufficient for many applications To obtain high precision measure ments the Dropout ratio can be reduced If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold you can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropou...

Page 771: ...hese conditions are recognized internally if a circuit breaker is open or just closed Furthermore the stage can be activated externally via the release binary input signal i i NOTE To enable internal release of the stage the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of the circuit breaker position the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices the respec...

Page 772: ... Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 3901 4 Dropout ratio 0 90 The recommended setting value of 0 90 is sufficient for many applications To obtain extremely accurate measurements the dropout ratio can be reduced If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold you can increase the dropout ratio This avoids chattering of the tripping stage Settings Addr Parameter ...

Page 773: ...andard 1 Inactive SPS O _ 3901 52 Standard 1 Behavior ENS O _ 3901 53 Standard 1 Health ENS O _ 3901 300 Standard 1 Rel by CB switch on ACT O _ 3901 55 Standard 1 Pickup ACD O _ 3901 57 Standard 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 11 Instantaneous High Current Tripping SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 773 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 774: ...ge dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory set stages Inverse time overcurrent protection voltage dependent stage Definite time overcurrent protection undervoltage seal in stage In this function the following stages can operate simultaneously A maximum of 2 inverse time overcurrent protection voltage dependent stages A maximum of 2 inverse time overcurrent protection volt...

Page 775: ...nt Protection Voltage Dependent Method of Measurement You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp standard method or the calculated RMS value 7 12 3 7 12 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 12 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 775 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 776: ...ated voltage in the function block General of the protec tion function group PU sett Pickup threshold setting parameter address _11491 3 PU V Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0 03 Irated This value cannot be decreased any further even not by voltage dependent pickup threshold factor Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried ...

Page 777: ...thus also the operate signal A running time delay is reset The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and recording takes place Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device internal Inrush current detection function is described in chapter 7 4 7 1 Description App...

Page 778: ...urrent protection operates with short tripping times as short circuit protection and not as overload protection Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx 10 for transformers and motors to approx 20 above the maximum expected load Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value The stage only picks up at approx 10 above the Threshold Parameter Type of character curve...

Page 779: ... A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 11491 101 V dependent 1 Type of character curve _ 11491 102 V dependent 1 Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 11491 103 V dependent 1 Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O V dependent 1...

Page 780: ...d This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse time overcurrent voltage dependent stage see chapter 7 12 3 1 Description The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate curve 7 12 4 7 12 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 12 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection 780 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Editio...

Page 781: ... of this stage refer to chapter 7 12 3 2 Applica tion and Setting Notes Parameter Blk by meas volt failure Recommended setting value _ 10 Blk by meas volt failure yes You can use the Blk by meas volt failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a measuring voltage failure is detected A measuring voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met The dev...

Page 782: ...I normal inverse ANSI moderately inv ANSI definite inverse IEC normal inverse IEC very inverse IEC extremely inv IEC long time inverse IEC normal inverse _ 102 V release Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 103 V release Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 _ 104 V release Under voltage threshold 0 300 V to 175 000 V 75 000 V Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V release _ ...

Page 783: ...levels can be due to one of these factors Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually Failure of the automatic voltage controller After full load shedding of a generator Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode Structure of the Function The Overvoltage protection with 3 phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with voltage mea...

Page 784: ...amental comp This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis 7 13 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 13 Overvoltage Protection w...

Page 785: ...lect this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Do not set the threshold value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement Parameter Measured value Default setting _ 181 9 Measured value phase to phase With the Measured value parameter you define whether the stage monitors the phase to phase voltages VAB VBC and VCA or ...

Page 786: ...via the Operate flt rec blocked parameter EXAMPLE Example for 2 stage overvoltage protection The example describes the possible settings for a 2 stage overvoltage protection function We will look at the settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay 1 Stage To detect stationary overvoltages set the threshold value of the first overvoltage protection element at least 10 above the max statio...

Page 787: ...ode off on test off _ 182 2 Definite T 2 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 182 9 Definite T 2 Measured value phase to ground phase to phase phase to phase _ 182 8 Definite T 2 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 182 101 Definite T 2 Pickup mode 1 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 _ 182 3 Definite T 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 340 000 V 130 000 V _ 182 4 Definite T 2 Dropo...

Page 788: ... ACT O Definite T 2 _ 182 81 Definite T 2 Block stage SPS I _ 182 54 Definite T 2 Inactive SPS O _ 182 52 Definite T 2 Behavior ENS O _ 182 53 Definite T 2 Health ENS O _ 182 55 Definite T 2 Pickup ACD O _ 182 300 Definite T 2 Pickup loop AB SPS O _ 182 301 Definite T 2 Pickup loop BC SPS O _ 182 302 Definite T 2 Pickup loop CA SPS O _ 182 56 Definite T 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 182 57 Defin...

Page 789: ...comp This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis 7 13 7 Protection and Automation Functions 7 13 Overvoltage Protection with 3 Ph...

Page 790: ...ssed Operate delay starts The operate delay is the sum of inverse time delay and additional time delay Where Top Operate delay Tinv Inverse time delay Tadd Additional time delay parameter Additional time delay After pickup the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold An integrator accumulates the value 1 Tinv Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed v...

Page 791: ...lly or internally via the binary input signal Block stage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With the Method of measurement parameter you define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental component standard method default setting or the calculated RMS value Parameter Value Description fundamental c...

Page 792: ...e overvoltage condition 3 out of 3 or if only 1 measuring element detects the over voltage condition 1 out of 3 Parameter Value Description 1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage range Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting This reflects how the function behaved in previous generations SIPROTEC 4 SIPROTEC 3 3 out of 3 Select this setti...

Page 793: ...e flt rec blocked no yes no _ 9 Inverse T Measured value phase to ground phase to phase phase to phase _ 8 Inverse T Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 108 Inverse T Pickup mode 1 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 _ 3 Inverse T Threshold 0 300 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 101 Inverse T Pickup factor 1 00 to 1 20 1 10 _ 102 Inverse T Charact constant k 0 00 to 300 00 1 0...

Page 794: ...p loop BC SPS O _ 302 Inverse T Pickup loop CA SPS O _ 56 Inverse T Operate delay expired ACT O _ 57 Inverse T Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 13 Overvoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 794 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 795: ...e Function The Overvoltage protection with positive sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The function Overvoltage protection with positive sequence voltage comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical structure dwovpu1s 030211 01 t...

Page 796: ...king is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 211 3 Threshold 65 V The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive sequence system Specify the Threshold pickup threshold for the specific application Parameter Operate delay Default _ 211 6 Operate delay 3 s The Operate delay must...

Page 797: ...ult Setting Stage 1 _ 211 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 211 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 211 3 Stage 1 Threshold 0 300 V to 200 000 V 65 000 V _ 211 4 Stage 1 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 211 6 Stage 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 3 00 s Stage 2 _ 212 1 Stage 2 Mode off on test off _ 212 2 Stage 2 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 212 3 Stage 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 20...

Page 798: ...ge 2 Inactive SPS O _ 212 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 212 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 212 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 212 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 212 57 Stage 2 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 14 Overvoltage Protection with Positive Sequence Voltage 798 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 799: ...which are based on voltage measurement The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical struc ture dwovpuxs 030211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 146 Structure Embedding of the Function 7 15 7 15 1 7 15 2 Protection and Automation Functions 7 15 Overvolta...

Page 800: ...lues and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the parameter value RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Measured Value The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured directly connected vol...

Page 801: ...391 9 Measured value VA measured The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in the Appendix The following setting options...

Page 802: ... with the voltage type VN broken delta you set the threshold value based on the equivalent zero sequence voltage Calculate the equivalent zero sequence voltage V0 equiv sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the following formula You can find more information about the Matching ratio Vph VN parameter in chapter 5 1 4 Appli cation and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3 Phase V 3ph Param...

Page 803: ... rec blocked no yes no _ 392 9 Stage 2 Measured value VA measured VB measured VC measured VAB measured VBC measured VCA measured VAB calculated VBC calculated VCA calculated V0 calculated VA measured _ 392 8 Stage 2 Method of measure ment fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 392 3 Stage 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 340 000 V 130 000 V _ 392 4 Stage 2 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 392 6 Stag...

Page 804: ...Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 392 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 392 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 392 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 392 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 392 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 392 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 392 57 Stage 2 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 15 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 804 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040...

Page 805: ...tage protection with 3 phase voltage the following stages can be operated simul taneously 3 stages Definite time undervoltage protection 2 stages Inverse time undervoltage protection Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure The protection function is structured such that one current flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec tion stages see Figure 7 148 If...

Page 806: ...stagecontrol vsd 2 en_US Figure 7 149 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control 7 16 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 16 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 806 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 807: ...e This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Measured Value With the Measured value parameter you define whether the stage analyzes the phase to phase voltages VAB VBC and VCA or the phase to ground voltages VA VB and VC If the measured value is set to phase to phase ...

Page 808: ...rrent flow crite rion The function reports when the current flow criterion is fulfilled Figure 7 150 illustrates the influence of the current flow criterion i i NOTE If the _ 2311 104 Current flow criterion parameter is deactivated the device picks up imme diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active The param eter setting can be changed even when ...

Page 809: ...possible Note that switching procedures opening of the CB can result in brief pickup of the stage depending on the threshold value settings for under voltage pickup and the current flow criterion To prevent unwanted trip ping you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms yes Use this setting when switching procedures opening of the CB are not permitted to result in stage pickup Note that pickup i...

Page 810: ...p RMS value fundamental comp _ 422 101 Definite T 2 Pickup mode 1 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 _ 422 102 Definite T 2 Pickup delay no yes no _ 422 3 Definite T 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 175 000 V 65 000 V _ 422 4 Definite T 2 Dropout ratio 1 01 to 1 20 1 05 _ 422 6 Definite T 2 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 50 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 500 General Cur...

Page 811: ...O _ 422 53 Definite T 2 Health ENS O _ 422 55 Definite T 2 Pickup ACD O _ 422 300 Definite T 2 Pickup loop AB SPS O _ 422 301 Definite T 2 Pickup loop BC SPS O _ 422 302 Definite T 2 Pickup loop CA SPS O _ 422 56 Definite T 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 422 57 Definite T 2 Operate ACT O Description Logic of the Stage lo_UVP3ph_In_StageControl 2 en_US Figure 7 151 Logic Diagram of the Stage Contr...

Page 812: ...s method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Protection and Automation Functions 7 16 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 81...

Page 813: ... inverse time delay and additional time delay Top TInv Tadd Where Top Operate delay TInv Inverse time delay Tadd Additional time delay Parameter Additional time delay After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value An integrator accumulates the value 1 TInv Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1 the inverse time delay expires The ...

Page 814: ...value the pickup signal is going and the dropout is started You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time Instanta neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay time During the Reset time 0 s the elapsed operate delay is frozen If the stage picks up again within this period the stage operates when the rest of operate de...

Page 815: ...Value Description 1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage range Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting This reflects how the function behaved in previous generations SIPROTEC 4 SIPROTEC 3 3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power system in the case of wind farms for example Parameter Pickup delay Def...

Page 816: ...hich is started when the voltage exceeds the dropout value Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession Siemens recom mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value 0 s to ensure the operation Otherwise Siemens recommends keeping the default value to ensure a fast reset of the...

Page 817: ...e T Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 108 Inverse T Reset time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inverse T _ 81 Inverse T Block stage SPS I _ 54 Inverse T Inactive SPS O _ 52 Inverse T Behavior ENS O _ 53 Inverse T Health ENS O _ 55 Inverse T Pickup ACD O _ 300 Inverse T Pickup loop AB SPS O _ 301 Inverse T Pickup loop BC SPS O _ 302 Inver...

Page 818: ...ection with any voltage comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical struc ture The protection function is structured such that one current flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec tion stages see Figure 7 154 dwstuvux 110211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 154 Structure Embedding of the Functio...

Page 819: ... with the funda mental component or the calculated RMS value Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are i...

Page 820: ...tes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 571 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental component standard method default setting or the calculated RMS value Parameter Value Description fundamental comp Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient voltage p...

Page 821: ...s a phase to phase variable i i NOTE If the function is used in a Voltage current 1 phase function group connected to the 1 phase voltage measuring point with the voltage type VN broken delta you set the threshold value based on the equivalent zero sequence voltage Calculate the equivalent zero sequence voltage V0 equiv sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the following formula You can find m...

Page 822: ... the Operate flt rec blocked parameter Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 101 General Current flow criterion off on on Stage 1 _ 571 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 571 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 571 9 Stage 1 Measured value VA measured VB measured VC measured VAB measured VBC measured VCA measured VAB calculated VBC calculated VCA calculat...

Page 823: ...300 General Current crit fulf SPS O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Stage 1 _ 571 81 Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 571 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 571 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 571 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 571 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 571 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 571 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 572 81 Stage 2 Block s...

Page 824: ...t load Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations selectable from the DIGSI functions library The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use Structure of the Function The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 fact...

Page 825: ...gle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the frequency change the current frequency can be derived from it Filtering method method B The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency using a suitable combination of filters The frequency protection function selects automatically the largest voltage as the measurand In...

Page 826: ...method of measurement Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement You can implement a 2 out of 2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a logical AND gate This increases the reliability of protection Frequency Measurement Method Description Angle difference method method A Select this method of measurement...

Page 827: ...y limit could be 1 03 frated If the machine does not recover it can be shut down with a 2nd stage of for example 1 08 frated To avoid overfunctions you can set a sufficient time delay for the warning indication or tripping For this application 2 stages of the overfrequency protection are used The following table shows a setting suggestion Stage Caused by Setting Values At frated 50 Hz At frated 60...

Page 828: ...PS I _ 31 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 31 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 31 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 31 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 31 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 31 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 32 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 32 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 32 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 32 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 32 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 32 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired A...

Page 829: ...distur bances of the power and frequency controller Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations selectable from the DIGSI functions library The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use Structure of the Function The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The Underf...

Page 830: ...ngle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the frequency change the current frequency can be derived from it Filtering method method B The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency using a suitable combination of filters The frequency protection function selects automatically the largest voltage as the measurand I...

Page 831: ... stage is used for the protection of machines Filtering method functional configuration B Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is used in an electrical power system Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 61 3 Threshold 49 80 Hz for frated 50 Hz The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in dependence...

Page 832: ...bine blades You can delay the tripping in order to give the speed controllers sufficient time for a response The frequency value to be set depends on the specifications of the power plant operator or the turbine manu facturer speed monitoring It is approx 0 94 frated For this application 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used The following table shows a setting suggestion Stage Caused ...

Page 833: ...ge 1 Inactive SPS O _ 61 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 61 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 61 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 61 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 61 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 62 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 62 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 62 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 62 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 62 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 62 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 62 57 Sta...

Page 834: ...Underfrequency load shedding function can be used in the Voltage Current 3 phase function group and in the Line function group The Underfrequency load shedding function comes factory set with 8 stages A maximum of 12 stages can be operated simultaneously within the function These stages are identical in structure dw_load shedding_Structure 1 en_US Figure 7 160 Structure Embedding of the Function 7...

Page 835: ..._US Figure 7 161 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality 1 n means the number of the protection stage 7 20 3 7 20 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 20 Underfrequency Load Shedding SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 835 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 836: ... the positive active power flow direction of the func tion in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality You can find more informa tion in chapter 7 20 3 2 Application and Setting Notes In the following figures if the power flow is located in the release area which is marked in gray the protection stages are released In the remaining area the protection stages are b...

Page 837: ...riterion You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter The power criterion is carried out only when the Power criterion parameter is set to yes The working method of the current criterion and of the power angle criterion differ at Phi power crite rion 0 and Phi power criterion 0 Protection and Automation Functions 7 20 Underfrequency Load Sh...

Page 838: ...ater than the Minimum voltage The df dt rising blocking takes place when the df dt rising value exceeds the setting value of the param eter df dt rising blk threshold It is signaled via the indication df dt rising blocking The df dt falling blocking takes place when the df dt falling value exceeds the setting value of the param eter df dt falling blk threshold It is signaled via the indication df ...

Page 839: ...ve power direction parameter is used With the Positive power direction parameter you can set the positive active power flow direction either to the same as or to the inverse of the standard forward direction For device 1 set the Positive power direction parameter to inv to CT neu pnt sett Then the positive active power flow direction of the power criterion is opposite to the standard forward direc...

Page 840: ...nt of the connected current measuring point Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter df dt rising blk criterion df dt rising blk threshold df dt falling blk criterion df dt falling blk threshold Default setting _ 18121 107 df dt rising blk criterion no Default setting _ 18121 108 df dt rising blk threshold 1 0 Hz s Default setting _ 18121 109 df dt falling blk criterion no Default se...

Page 841: ...lled a Pickup indication is issued The frequency value drops below the Threshold The Blocking input from the function block General is inactive The preceding 2 conditions are fulfilled during the configured number of frequency measurement cycles cycle time 10 ms You can set the number with the parameter f stabilization counter 7 20 4 7 20 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 7 20 Underfrequency...

Page 842: ... is all protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on become active again After a normal device restart reset the statuses of the protection stages which were influenced by the SPS signal Exclusive activation or the SPC signal Exclusive activation are still maintained After an initial startup the exclusive stage activation is reset EXAMPLE Configured protection stages Protection stages 1 t...

Page 843: ...z and the dropout differential to 20 mHz the stage drops out at 48 98 Hz Due to the high precision frequency measurement the setting value can remain at the default value of 20 mHz Parameter Operate flt rec blocked Default setting _ 18151 2 Operate flt rec blocked no With the Operate flt rec blocked parameter you can block the operate indication the fault recording and the fault log Parameter f st...

Page 844: ...periods 5 periods _ 18121 112 General df dt dropout differential 0 02 Hz s to 0 99 Hz s 0 10 Hz s _ 18121 113 General f stabilization counter 1 to 20 6 Stage 1 _ 18151 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 18151 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 18151 3 Stage 1 Threshold 40 00 Hz to 70 00 Hz 49 00 Hz _ 18151 5 Stage 1 Dropout differ ential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz _ 18151 6 Stage 1 Operate...

Page 845: ...usive activation SPS I _ 18151 347 Stage 1 Exclusive activation SPC C _ 18151 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 18151 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 18151 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 18151 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 18151 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 18151 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 20 Underfrequency Load Shedding SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 84...

Page 846: ...g stage and 1 df dt falling stage A maximum of 5 df dt rising stages and 5 df dt falling stages can operate simul taneously within the function Both of the function block types are similar in structure Undervoltage check and df dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level All stages use these general functionalities dwdfdt01 160113 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 166 Str...

Page 847: ...ption df dt Calculated rate of frequency change Application and Setting Notes Parameter Minimum voltage Recommended setting value _ 13171 101 Minimum voltage 37 500 V For the Undervoltage blocking 65 of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive sequence voltage When determining the setting value keep in mind that the absolute...

Page 848: ... Falling The stage df dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df dt rising is used to detect frequency rising You set the threshold value as an absolute value You define the frequency change direction via the selected stage type Blocking of the Stage The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely Via the binary input signal Block stage Via the undervoltage blocki...

Page 849: ...ors salient pole machines H 1 5 s to 6 s For turbine driven generators non salient pole rotors H 2 s to 10 s For industrial turbine driven generators H 3 s to 4 s EXAMPLE frated 50 Hz H 3 s Case 1 ΔP Srated 0 12 Case 2 ΔP Srated 0 48 Case 1 df dt 1 Hz s Case 2 df dt 4 Hz s Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 13231 6 Operate delay 1 00 s You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfu...

Page 850: ... no yes no _ 13231 3 df dt falling1 Threshold 0 100 Hz s to 20 000 Hz s 3 000 Hz s _ 13231 4 df dt falling1 Dropout differential 0 02 Hz s to 0 99 Hz s 0 10 Hz s _ 13231 6 df dt falling1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 1 00 s df dt rising1 _ 13201 1 df dt rising1 Mode off on test off _ 13201 2 df dt rising1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 13201 3 df dt rising1 Threshold 0 100 Hz s to 20 000 Hz...

Page 851: ...sing1 _ 13201 81 df dt rising1 Block stage SPS I _ 13201 54 df dt rising1 Inactive SPS O _ 13201 52 df dt rising1 Behavior ENS O _ 13201 53 df dt rising1 Health ENS O _ 13201 55 df dt rising1 Pickup ACD O _ 13201 56 df dt rising1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13201 57 df dt rising1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 7 21 Rate of Frequency Change Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Ba...

Page 852: ...d currents of the 3 phases for calculation of the power The 3 phase power protection P Q function comes with one factory set stage each for the active and the reactive power The following stages are preconfigured Power P Power Q Power P Power Q A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the func tion The tripping stages have an identical struct...

Page 853: ...specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping stage Possible settings are positive seq power and the phase selective powers power of phase A power of phase B or power of phase C Pickup Characteristic With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage stage type Power P or as a smaller stage stage type Power P 7 22 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 22 Power ...

Page 854: ... the threshold value will lead to a pickup Dropout Delay A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold The pickup is maintained for the specified time The time delay of the tripping parameter Operate delay continues to run Once the Operate delay has elapsed the stage trips Blocking the Stage In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset B...

Page 855: ...f phase B or power of phase C Pickup Characteristic With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage stage type Power Q or as a smaller stage stage type Power Q The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage The Tilt power charac teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic The figure below shows the defini tion of the ...

Page 856: ...tage will be reset Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage Application Example The setting of the function will be explained using an active reactive power range as an example If the appa rent power phasor is within the power range in Figure 7 175 tripping zone defined by characteristics an alarm indication is generated For this purpose you h...

Page 857: ...aracteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates Set the parameter Threshold to 0 i i NOTE If you use several settings groups consider the following The dropout value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups Switching from a positive dropout value to a negative dropout value or vice versa is not allowed As a result DIGSI reports an inconsistency If you want to chang...

Page 858: ...sitive seq power The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated For 3 phase measurement Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive sequence system power Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 6331 3 Threshold 0 The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage In the example the pickup characteristic runs a...

Page 859: ...arameter C Setting Options Default Setting Power P 1 _ 6241 1 Power P 1 Mode off on test off _ 6241 2 Power P 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 6241 104 Power P 1 Measured value power of phase A power of phase B power of phase C positive seq power positive seq power _ 6241 3 Power P 1 Threshold 200 0 to 200 0 80 0 _ 6241 101 Power P 1 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 6241 103 Power P 1 Tilt p...

Page 860: ...rec blocked no yes no _ 6331 105 Power Q 1 Measured value power of phase A power of phase B power of phase C positive seq power positive seq power _ 6331 3 Power Q 1 Threshold 200 0 to 200 0 30 0 _ 6331 101 Power Q 1 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 6331 103 Power Q 1 Tilt power characteristic 89 0 to 89 0 0 0 _ 6331 7 Power Q 1 Dropout delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 6331 6 Power Q 1 Operate de...

Page 861: ...O _ 6301 53 Power Q 1 Health ENS O _ 6301 55 Power Q 1 Pickup ACD O _ 6301 56 Power Q 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 6301 57 Power Q 1 Operate ACT O Power Q 1 _ 6331 81 Power Q 1 Block stage SPS I _ 6331 54 Power Q 1 Inactive SPS O _ 6331 52 Power Q 1 Behavior ENS O _ 6331 53 Power Q 1 Health ENS O _ 6331 55 Power Q 1 Pickup ACD O _ 6331 56 Power Q 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 6331 57 Power Q ...

Page 862: ... the activated measuring points are switched over The other measuring points remain unaffected Structure of the Function The Phase sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power system data You will find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Settings There you will find the parameter for setting the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influenc...

Page 863: ...sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is initi ated via the binary input Phs rotation reversal This switches over the phase sequence simultane ously at all 3 phase measuring points The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence If the phase sequence is set via the Phase seque...

Page 864: ...pp 240211 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 179 Application Example for Phase Rotation Reversal in a Pump Station The example shows 2 differential protection devices IED1 and IED2 and an impedance protection IED3 with the connected measuring points The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1 as the protected object is not affected by the switchover option of the phase sequenc...

Page 865: ...xample of currents The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending at the selected measuring points The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms The change of phase sequence is only implemented if the measurands at the measuring points that are to be switched are under 5 of the rated variables If the currents of the measuring...

Page 866: ...rameter Inverted phases In doing so the phase sequence of the selected measuring point is changed Changing of the phase sequence via the binary input is only possible if no measurand 5 of the rated variables is present at the respective 3 phase measuring point Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 101 General Phase sequence ABC ACB ABC General _ 101 VT 3 phase Rated p...

Page 867: ...equence ACB SPS O _ 321 General Freq out of oper range SPS O _ 322 General f sys MV O _ 323 General f track MV O General _ 315 VT 3 phase Phases AB inverted SPS O _ 316 VT 3 phase Phases BC inverted SPS O _ 317 VT 3 phase Phases AC inverted SPS O 7 23 6 Protection and Automation Functions 7 23 Phase Sequence Switchover SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 867 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 1...

Page 868: ...th the pickup measurement Structure of the Function The function is preconfigured with a stage A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The stages have an identical structure dwstrsto 030211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 181 Structure Embedding of the Function 7 24 7 24 1 7 24 2 Protection and Automation Functions 7 24 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 868 ...

Page 869: ...s see chapter i i NOTE If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush current detection function the Instan taneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up In this case there is no fault recording either Despite this if a fault recording is necessary you can activate it with the parameter _ 114 Start flt rec of the function Inrush current detection function se...

Page 870: ...refore set to 0 Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Stage 1 _ 5941 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 5941 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 5941 6 Stage 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 5941 102 Stage 1 Configuration Setting options depend on config uration Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup A...

Page 871: ... measure ment The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite time negative sequence protection stages In the function Negative sequence protection the following stages can be operated simultaneously 3 stages Definite time negative sequence protection 2 stages Inverse time negative sequence protection The stages have an identical structure Stages that are not preconfigured are sh...

Page 872: ...rmalized to the reference current The selection of the reference current is made in the FB General Blocking of the Stage When blocked the picked up protection stage will drop out In addition to the current blocking see Current limitation Imax and Maximum phase current the stages can be blocked in the following ways Via the binary input signal Block stage from an external or internal source When le...

Page 873: ...Setting General _ 2311 106 General Reference value pos seq current rated current rated current _ 2311 107 General Current limita tion Imax no yes no _ 2311 101 General Maximum phase current 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 10 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 50 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 10 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 50 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 10 000...

Page 874: ...up indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Definite T 1 _ 1981 81 Definite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 1981 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 1981 53 Definite T 1 Health ENS O _ 1981 54 Definite T 1 Inactive SPS O _ 1981 56 Definite T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 1981 300 Definite T 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 1981 55 Definite T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 1981 57 Definite T 1 Operate AC...

Page 875: ...teristic curve is processed An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the characteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 0 95 0 95...

Page 876: ...r to chapter 11 30 Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 3 Threshold 10 0 The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application A threshold value of 10 is a practicable value for fault detection for different applications Parameter Time dial Recommended setting value _ 107 Time dial 1 00 With the parameter Time dial you ...

Page 877: ...ar acter curve _ 106 Inverse T Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 107 Inverse T Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inverse T _ 81 Inverse T Block stage SPS I _ 52 Inverse T Behavior ENS O _ 53 Inverse T Health ENS O _ 54 Inverse T Inactive SPS O _ 56 Inverse T Operate delay expired ACT O _ 300 Inverse T Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 5...

Page 878: ...tection 3 phase advanced stage dw_TOLP_with Filter stage 2 en_US Figure 7 186 Structure Embedding of the Function Filter for RMS Value Gain Description The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means To gain harmonics in a defined way Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more than lower harmonics This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters In ...

Page 879: ...en the function block Filter is instantiated and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes Otherwise the normal RMS value is used Functional Measured Values Values Description Primary Secon dary Referenced to Iph A Filtered RMS measured value of current A kA A Parameter Rated current Iph B Filtered RMS measured value of current B kA A Parameter Rated current Iph C Filtered RMS measured value of cu...

Page 880: ...e SIPROTEC download area The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter The amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated by the filter To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device set the following coe...

Page 881: ... MV O Description Logic lo_TOLP_withFilterstage 2 en_US Figure 7 188 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced Stage 7 26 3 4 7 26 4 Protection and Automation Functions 7 26 Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 881 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 882: ... body model according to the thermal differential equation with fo_diffgl 170914 2 en_US With the following standardization fo_normie 170914 3 en_US Θ Current overtemperature in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permis sible phase current k Irated obj ΘAmb Standardized ambient temperature where ϑAmbdescribes the coupled ambient temper ature The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can be ...

Page 883: ...f tripping overtemperature is exceeded an operate indication is immediately issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply This threshold is specified at 100 and corre sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current Imax Figure 7 190 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds dwtempve 030211 01 tif 1 en_US F...

Page 884: ...e sensor can be selected If the temperature measurement is faulty for example due to an open circuit between the device and the RTD unit the device reports this In this case the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under the Default temperature parameter depending on which value is the highest Current Influence The thermal replica based on the single body mo...

Page 885: ...ect for the set Emerg start T overtravel Blocking the Function Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset The tripping function can be blocked externally or inter nally by the binary input signal Block stage All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0 Blocking Closure The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high th...

Page 886: ...lue for special applications desired additional cooling or longer blocking of closing Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value Parameter Emerg start T overtravel Default setting _ 112 Emerg start T overtravel 300 s This functionality is not required for protection of lines and cables If the logical binary indication is not routed the Emerg s...

Page 887: ...hermal time constant according to the following formula fodauers 170309 07 tif 2 en_US If the short term current rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s use the short time current instead of the 1 s current Multiply the result by the specified application time For a given short term current carrying capacity of 0 5 s use the following formula fodauers 170309 01 tif 2 en...

Page 888: ...vin K which can be accepted as is If the absolute temperature is given the ambient temperature must be deducted As a rule this is 40 C The overtemperature at maximum permissible current ϑmax and the Temperature rise at Irated ϑrated obj can be converted by using the following formula fo_ueb_for_Irated 3 en_US EXAMPLE Temperature class B for continuous operation permissible overtemperature 80 K Fro...

Page 889: ...erature of the protected object and feed it to the device via an RTD unit The Thermal overload protection 3 phase advanced function receives the measured temperature value via the functions RTD unit Ether or RTD unit Serial from the function group Analog transformer Parameter Default temperature Default setting _ 118 Default temperature 40 C The Default temperature is set as ambient temperature un...

Page 890: ... 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 2 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 12 500 A _ 108 49 Th overl Imin cooling 1 A 100 Irated 0 000 A to 10 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 00 A to 50 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 000 A to 10 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 00 A to 50 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 1 600 A 0 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 8 000 A 2 500 A _ 109 49 Th overl Tempera ture rise...

Page 891: ...9 Th overl Operate ACT O _ 304 49 Th overl Time until close MV O _ 305 49 Th overl Time until trip MV O _ 306 49 Th overl Overload phase A MV O _ 307 49 Th overl Overload phase B MV O _ 308 49 Th overl Overload phase C MV O _ 309 49 Th overl Overload maximum MV O _ 310 49 Th overl Equival current phs A MV O _ 311 49 Th overl Equival current phs B MV O _ 312 49 Th overl Equival current phs C MV O _...

Page 892: ...The Thermal overload protection 1 phase function is used in 1 phase protection function groups with current measurement The Thermal overload protection 1 phase function is steplessly preconfigured dwtolp1p 270613 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 191 Structure Embedding of the Function 7 27 7 27 1 7 27 2 Protection and Automation Functions 7 27 Thermal Overload Protection 1 Phase 892 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage...

Page 893: ...the current flowing in the protected object for example reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point on the basis of a thermal single body model according to the thermal differential equation with fodiffgl 310510 01 tif 2 en_US 7 27 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 27 Thermal Overload Protection 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 893 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition ...

Page 894: ...urrent of the protected object In a steady state the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e function whose asymptote repre sents the final overtemperature Θend The time constant τth determines the rise After reaching an initial adjust able overtemperature threshold Θwarn Threshold thermal warn a warning indication is given If the overtemperature limit ΘOff tripping overtemperature i...

Page 895: ...Influence The thermal replica based on the single body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations short circuits To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection the thermal replica must be influenced for overcurrents exceeding llimit You can select between 2 strategies for this Freezing of the thermal memory Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set ...

Page 896: ... calculation of this value is based on the assumption of constant currents The thermal replica has then fallen below the setting value of the dropout threshold _ 305 Time until trip The Time until trip is the expected time until tripping 100 value exceeded occurs The calculation of this value is based on the assumption of constant currents _ 306 Overload The value Overload indicates the current te...

Page 897: ...i NOTE The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or from the specifications of the manufacturer Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications Parameter Thermal time constant Default value _ 110 Thermal time constant 900 s 15 min The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the operate cur...

Page 898: ...erated with the rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40 C Here the rated current refers to the protected object You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value If you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current deduct the actual ambient temperature or the coolant temperature from the measured value When selecting the...

Page 899: ...evices If you wish to take further temper ature rise into consideration the current limiting procedure is recommended Parameter Value Description current limiting The input current is limited to the value set in the Imax thermal parameter If the measured current exceeds the set current value the limited current value is supplied to the thermal replica An advisable current threshold is approx 2 to ...

Page 900: ...000 A 1 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 5 000 A _ 104 49 Th overl Threshold thermal warn 50 to 100 90 _ 105 49 Th overl Dropout threshold operate 50 to 99 90 _ 106 49 Th overl K factor 0 10 to 4 00 1 10 _ 110 49 Th overl Therma...

Page 901: ...havior ENS O _ 53 49 Th overl Health ENS O _ 301 49 Th overl Current warning SPS O _ 302 49 Th overl Thermal warning SPS O _ 303 49 Th overl Block close SPS O _ 55 49 Th overl Pickup ACD O _ 300 49 Th overl Operate alarm only ACT O _ 57 49 Th overl Operate ACT O _ 304 49 Th overl Time until close MV O _ 305 49 Th overl Time until trip MV O _ 306 49 Th overl Overload MV O _ 310 49 Th overl Equival ...

Page 902: ... measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether or RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group Structure of the Function The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups A maximum of 48 tempera ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function Each temperature supervision location has 2 thres...

Page 903: ...up indication independent of one another and after a set tripping time delay an operate indication The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing i i NOTE The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging The operate indications of the stages do not go into the trip logic of the device Application and Setting Notes If you use an external RTD unit con...

Page 904: ...sh the time the operate indication of the 1st tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup This time delay depends on the specific application If you set the time delay to the operate indication is blocked Parameter Threshold stage 2 Default setting _ 11101 42 Threshold stage 2 120 C With the Threshold stage 2 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a pickup of t...

Page 905: ...102 42 Point 2 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11102 43 Point 2 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11102 44 Point 2 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 3 _ 11103 46 Point 3 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11103 1 Point 3 Mode off on test off _ 11103 40 Point 3 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100 C _ 11103 41 Point 3 Operate delay of stage 1 ...

Page 906: ...105 42 Point 5 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11105 43 Point 5 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11105 44 Point 5 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 6 _ 11106 46 Point 6 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11106 1 Point 6 Mode off on test off _ 11106 40 Point 6 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100 C _ 11106 41 Point 6 Operate delay of stage 1 ...

Page 907: ...08 42 Point 8 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11108 43 Point 8 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11108 44 Point 8 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 9 _ 11109 46 Point 9 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11109 1 Point 9 Mode off on test off _ 11109 40 Point 9 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100 C _ 11109 41 Point 9 Operate delay of stage 1 0...

Page 908: ...te delay of stage 1 0 s to 60 s 5 s _ 11111 42 Point 11 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11111 43 Point 11 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11111 44 Point 11 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 12 _ 11112 46 Point 12 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11112 1 Point 12 Mode off on test off _ 11112 40 Point 12 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100...

Page 909: ... 3 Block stage SPS I _ 11103 54 Point 3 Inactive SPS O _ 11103 52 Point 3 Behavior ENS O _ 11103 53 Point 3 Health ENS O _ 11103 61 Point 3 Pickup stage 1 SPS O _ 11103 62 Point 3 Operate stage 1 SPS O _ 11103 63 Point 3 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11103 64 Point 3 Operate stage 2 SPS O Point 4 _ 11104 81 Point 4 Block stage SPS I _ 11104 54 Point 4 Inactive SPS O _ 11104 52 Point 4 Behavior ENS O _ 11...

Page 910: ...108 81 Point 8 Block stage SPS I _ 11108 54 Point 8 Inactive SPS O _ 11108 52 Point 8 Behavior ENS O _ 11108 53 Point 8 Health ENS O _ 11108 61 Point 8 Pickup stage 1 SPS O _ 11108 62 Point 8 Operate stage 1 SPS O _ 11108 63 Point 8 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11108 64 Point 8 Operate stage 2 SPS O Point 9 _ 11109 81 Point 9 Block stage SPS I _ 11109 54 Point 9 Inactive SPS O _ 11109 52 Point 9 Behavio...

Page 911: ...O _ 11111 63 Point 11 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11111 64 Point 11 Operate stage 2 SPS O Point 12 _ 11112 81 Point 12 Block stage SPS I _ 11112 54 Point 12 Inactive SPS O _ 11112 52 Point 12 Behavior ENS O _ 11112 53 Point 12 Health ENS O _ 11112 61 Point 12 Pickup stage 1 SPS O _ 11112 62 Point 12 Operate stage 1 SPS O _ 11112 63 Point 12 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11112 64 Point 12 Operate stage 2 SPS O...

Page 912: ...e current measured values The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks General 3 stages Output logic 3 phase The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical structure The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function dw_structur...

Page 913: ...Function Block lo_fb0_arcprot 2 en_US Figure 7 197 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block 7 29 3 Protection and Automation Functions 7 29 Arc Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 913 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 914: ...of the arc sensors must be avoided i i NOTE Once an optical sensor has detected an arc you must replace the affected optical sensor Within the Arc protection function you can use a fast current flow criterion as an additional release criterion The parameters for the current flow criterion can be found in the General block For each stage you can select individually whether the current flow criterio...

Page 915: ...rm and the stage function is blocked Application and Setting Notes General Settings Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters The setting values apply to all stages Parameter Threshold I Default setting _ 2311 3 Threshold I 2 000 A Use the parameter Threshold I to define the trigger threshold of the phase currents The Threshold I is relevant for the current f...

Page 916: ...lt setting _ 14551 8 Operating mode current and light With the Operating mode parameter you define the basic functionality of the stage Parameter Value Description current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light The current flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an arc Siemens recommends using this setting value light only This stage operates o...

Page 917: ... 3 General Threshold I 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 10 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 10 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 2 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 10 000 A _ 2311 4 General Threshold 3I0 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 50 Ir...

Page 918: ... current light no _ 14553 8 Stage 3 Operating mode light only current and light current and light _ 14553 11 Stage 3 Sensor point sensor line sensor custom point sensor _ 14553 7 Stage 3 Threshold light 34 00 dB to 10 00 dB 20 00 dB _ 14553 10 Stage 3 Channel Setting options depend on configuration Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 82 General Block function SPS I ...

Page 919: ...ed SPS O _ 14552 301 Stage 2 Light detected SPS O _ 14552 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 14552 57 Stage 2 Operate ACT O Stage 3 _ 14553 81 Stage 3 Block stage SPS I _ 14553 501 Stage 3 External current SPS I _ 14553 502 Stage 3 External light SPS I _ 14553 54 Stage 3 Inactive SPS O _ 14553 52 Stage 3 Behavior ENS O _ 14553 53 Stage 3 Health ENS O _ 14553 318 Stage 3 Fault arc counter INC C _ 14553 58 S...

Page 920: ...ing figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors dw_arcprot light only 2 en_US Figure 7 199 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors Operating Mode Light only For this example the following is assumed The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit...

Page 921: ...cable connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection device in feeder 1 Arcs in the cable connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 1 Connect one optical point sensor from the cable connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection device in feeder 2 Arcs in the cable connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2 Connect optica...

Page 922: ... compartment supervision in the infeed The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode light only Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode Light and Current Description Overview The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2 feeders The Arc protection function operates with the Oper...

Page 923: ...eed The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment the circuit breaker compartment and the cable connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2 Furthermore the protection device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment the circuit breaker compartment and the cable connection compartment of the feeders or in ...

Page 924: ...d light applies to all stages Parameter Sensor point sensor applies to all stages Parameter External trip initiation no applies to all stages Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 1 Stage 1 Busbar compartment supervision in feeder 1 Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 2 Stage 2 Circuit breaker compartment supervision in feeder 1 Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 3 Stage 3 Cable connection compartm...

Page 925: ...t breaker compartment of the feeders the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs outputs a protection interface or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed Then the protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I and or Threshold 3I0 the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction Yo...

Page 926: ... If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold I and or Threshold 3I0 the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in the feeders If at the same time an optical sensor in a cable connection compartment detects light the protection device trips in the corresponding feeder Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1 The Arc protection function operates w...

Page 927: ...ice in the feeder Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal External current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective Parameter Operate flt rec blocked no Parameter Channel Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed The Arc protection function operates with 7 stages Stage 1 busbar compartment supervision Parameter Operate fl...

Page 928: ...he infeed switches off the arc Application and Setting Notes for Variant 2 with Feedback to Feeder Protection Devices General Notes Connect the optical sensors in the busbar compartment the CB compartment and the cable connection compartment of the feeder 1 and 2 and the infeed to the respective protection devices Arcs in the busbar compartment and in the CB compartment of the feeders must be clea...

Page 929: ...tages Stage 1 to 3 Parameter Operating mode light only Parameter External trip initiation no Parameter Operate flt rec blocked yes Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 1 Stage 1 Monitoring busbar compartment in feeder 2 Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 2 Stage 2 Monitoring CB compartment in feeder 2 Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 3 Stage 3 Monitoring cable connection compart ment in feeder ...

Page 930: ... initiation no Stage 4 to 7 External trip initiation Parameter Operate flt rec blocked no Parameter Operating mode current and light Parameter External trip initiation yes If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment or the CB compartment of the feeders the feeder device sends the indication Arc detected to the infeed device An external trip initiation via these stages is effec tive only if the...

Page 931: ...pervision of the Device Hardware 975 8 5 Supervision of Device Firmware 980 8 6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 981 8 7 Supervision of Communication Connections 982 8 8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 983 8 9 Group Indications 991 8 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 931 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 932: ...ware Supervision of hardware configuration Supervision of communication connections When the supervision functions pick up that will be displayed and also indicated Error responses are defined for the device The error responses are grouped in defect severities The supervision functions work selectively When the supervision functions pick up as far as possible only the affected parts of the hardwar...

Page 933: ...ned application is overloading the device The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas These areas combine functions with the same real time requirements in groups A green display in front of an area see Figure 8 1 indicates that the response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained A red exclamation point indicates that functions may have longer resp...

Page 934: ...ent triggered process range Create CFC chart Delete CFC chart Change the process range in the properties of the CFC chart Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event triggered process area Control Other contin uous function chart Opera tional measured values Control and interlocking CFC charts in the area of control measured value preprocessing and event controlled Operational measured values Ad...

Page 935: ...rder position 20 of the product code You can also order function points subsequently and so increase the function points account for the device i i NOTE Find out the function points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device For this you can use the device configurator CFC Resources Task Levels of the CFC Function A CFC chart and thus the configured CFC function runs in the...

Page 936: ...fic function blocks If enough ticks are available all CFC charts can be created in the same task level A tick is the measure of the performance requirement of CFC blocks The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration This calculation is based on the previously described load model In this process it is recommended to create all selected func...

Page 937: ... is recommended to configure only very high priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in any other level i i NOTE Empty CFC charts also consume system resources Empty charts that are not required any more should be deleted Supervision Functions 8 2 Resource Consumption Supervision SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 937 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 1...

Page 938: ...protection functions can go into a secure state A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the Function Description and as overall overview at the end of chapter 8 Measuring Voltage Failure Overview of Functions The Measuring voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits Non connected transformers Pickup o...

Page 939: ... failure Supervision for switching onto a 3 phase measuring voltage failure lozusamm 100611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 8 5 Breakdown of the Measuring Voltage Failure Detection Function Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication The function summarizes these indications via the group indication Alarm The response to the detection of a measuring voltage failure is explained in the specific pr...

Page 940: ...sequence and positive sequence current In the event of 1 pole automatic reclosing the supervision is blocked Delay Seal In In the presence of a weak infeed current 10 of rated current certain protection functions require more time for detection of a system incident For this purpose the monitoring can be delayed using the Asym fail time delay parameter If a system incident is detected during the ti...

Page 941: ... When the voltage returns even as 1 phase the monitoring drops out Release by Phase Current When all phase currents exceed the threshold value 3ph fail phs curr release the monitoring is released Blocking in the Case of a System Incident In the case of a 3 phase system incident supervision must be blocked The device detects a 3 phase incident with a jump in the current This change is detected via ...

Page 942: ... Breaker Condition for the Protected Object A voltage jump such as in a 3 phase measuring voltage failure with closed circuit breaker see chapter8 3 2 4 3 Phase Measuring Voltage Failure does not occur in the case of switching to a 3 phase measuring voltage failure If the monitoring is not blocked the time delay SO 3ph fail time delay is started After the time has elapsed the indication SO 3ph fai...

Page 943: ...ed the protection functions concerned will remain blocked This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an absence of the measuring voltage in the case of an unbalanced system inci dent This is the default setting yes The seal in function is switched off The supervision drops out immediately when a system incident is detected With this setting the unbalanced meas uring vol...

Page 944: ...e measuring voltage failure is active In the case of low loads the subfunction for detection of a 3 phase meas uring voltage failure is not released for example because the current flow is too low In this situation the subfunction Switching to a 3 phase meas uring voltage failure can perform the monitoring task Siemens recommends to switch that subfunction on off With the setting off the subfuncti...

Page 945: ...SPS O _ 301 Mes v fail det 3ph failure alarm SPS O _ 302 Mes v fail det SO 3ph failure alarm SPS O Signaling Voltage Supervision Overview of Functions Signaling voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC device via binary inputs For this purpose one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage If the signaling voltage fails the associa...

Page 946: ... the binary input used for signaling voltage supervision within one input output module using the setting option see the following figure This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage If the signaling voltage fails this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input output module to invalid The signal status of each of these binary inputs is fr...

Page 947: ...n can be located on any input output module within the group defined in this manner If you have to monitor several binary inputs that for example work with different signaling voltages from different sources then you can also instantiate and configure several Supervision group function blocks within the Signaling voltage supervision function group accordingly Within different supervision groups on...

Page 948: ...t setting _ 102 Enable variable group untrue You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the check mark If you have not set the check mark default setting only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision signal If you have set the check mark the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group and End supervision group You can then u...

Page 949: ...e 7 I O module 8 I O module 9 I O module 10 I O module 11 I O module 12 I O module 13 I O module 14 I O module 15 I O module 1 _ 105 Superv Grp Binary input 1 to 256 1 _ 102 Superv Grp Enable variable group 0 1 false Supervis grp start _ 106 Superv Grp I O module ID I O module 1 I O module 2 I O module 3 I O module 4 I O module 5 I O module 6 I O module 7 I O module 8 I O module 9 I O module 10 I ...

Page 950: ...re detec tion and should be used if possible in parallel to it The tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker has an impact on the quality of the recorded measured value data see chapter 3 3 Processing Quality Attributes For the following functions the reaction block not block can be set within the function in cases of a tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker Overcurrent prot...

Page 951: ...Open The input signal Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker As a rule this occurs via the routing to a binary input Parameter Response time of the voltage transformer circuit breaker Recommended setting value _ 101 Response time 0 ms When the voltage transformer circuit breaker drops out the device must block the distance protection imme diately to preve...

Page 952: ...nction is located in the Power system data of each 3 phase voltage measuring point dwstrusy 300913 2 en_US Figure 8 11 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function This function relates the smallest phase to phase voltage to the largest phase phase to phase voltage Unbalance is detected if Vmin Vmax Threshold min max as...

Page 953: ... the delay of the failure indication begins parameter Delay failure indication If both conditions persist during this time the indication Failure is generated Blocking the Function The following blockings reset the picked up function completely Externally or internally via the binary input signal Block function A protection pickup The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the Failure indic...

Page 954: ...V Inactive SPS O _ 52 Supv balan V Behavior ENS O _ 53 Supv balan V Health ENS O _ 71 Supv balan V Failure SPS O Voltage Sum Supervision Overview of Functions In healthy system operation the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0 The Voltage sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit It detects connection errors duri...

Page 955: ...on The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if VF VA VB VC Vph VN VN Threshold where Vph VN forms the Matching ratio Vph VN parameter lokenvss 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 15 Characteristic of the Voltage Sum Supervision 8 3 6 2 8 3 6 3 Supervision Functions 8 3 Supervision of the Secondary System SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Cont...

Page 956: ...unt the differing transformation ratios between the residual voltage input and the phase voltage inputs You can find more information in this respect in chapter 8 3 6 1 Overview of Functions Delay failure indication When the threshold value for the delay of the failure indication parameter Delay failure indication is exceeded the indication Failure is generated Blocking the Function The following ...

Page 957: ...0 s 5 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Supv sum V _ 82 Supv sum V Block function SPS I _ 54 Supv sum V Inactive SPS O _ 52 Supv sum V Behavior ENS O _ 53 Supv sum V Health ENS O _ 71 Supv sum V Failure SPS O Voltage Phase Rotation Supervision Overview of Functions The Voltage phase rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary circuit voltages ...

Page 958: ...ter 5 1 Power System Data To supervise the phase rotation the device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase sequence For abnormal phase sequences the indication Failure is generated The connection of the voltages to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence The connec tion diagrams are shown in chapter A Appendix Release Condition The supervision of the voltage pha...

Page 959: ...q V Delay failure indication 0 00 s to 100 00 s 5 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Supv ph seq V _ 82 Supv ph seq V Block function SPS I _ 54 Supv ph seq V Inactive SPS O _ 52 Supv ph seq V Behavior ENS O _ 53 Supv ph seq V Health ENS O _ 71 Supv ph seq V Failure SPS O Current Balance Supervision Overview of Functions In healthy network operation a certain balance between ...

Page 960: ...the smallest phase current to the largest phase current Unbalance is detected if Imin Imax Threshold min max as long as Imax Release threshold losymmke 040211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 20 Characteristic of the Current Balance Supervision 8 3 8 3 Supervision Functions 8 3 Supervision of the Secondary System 960 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 961: ...hreshold the operate delay of the failure indication parameter Delay failure indication begins If both conditions persist during this time the indication Failure is generated Blocking the Function The following blockings reset the picked up function completely Externally or internally via the binary input signal Block function A protection pickup The pickup signal of a protection function blocks t...

Page 962: ...0 s 5 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Supv balan I _ 82 Supv balan I Block function SPS I _ 54 Supv balan I Inactive SPS O _ 52 Supv balan I Behavior ENS O _ 53 Supv balan I Health ENS O _ 71 Supv balan I Failure SPS O Current Sum Supervision Overview of Functions In healthy system operation the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0 The Curren...

Page 963: ... 300913 2 en_US Figure 8 22 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors Errors in the current circuits are detected if IF IA IB IC kl IN Threshold Slope factor Σ I lokensum 300311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 23 Characteristic of the Current Sum Supervision 8 3 9 2 8 3 9 3 Supervision Functions 8 3 Supervision of the Secondary...

Page 964: ...es this fault current limit with the formula IFmax Threshold Slope factor Σ I The device uses the current inputs IA IB IC and IN to calculate The fault current IF IA IB IC kl IN The maximum current Σ I IA IB IC kl IN with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground current transformer IN for example cable type current transformer Transformation ...

Page 965: ...aximum Imax phase current This function calculates the RMS values Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 102 Threshold 0 1 A for Irated 1 A or 0 5 A for Irated 5 A The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current Imax Parameter Delay failure indication Recommended setting value _ 6 Delay failure indication 5 00 s Set the Delay failure indication parameter so that overfunct...

Page 966: ... the sequence of the zero crossings with same sign of the currents This enables the device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning The criterion for the check is the setting of the Phase sequence parameter The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component Structure of the Function The Current phase rotation supervision function is located in the ...

Page 967: ...ot depend on the selected phase sequence The connec tion diagrams are shown in the chapter A Appendix Release Condition The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than 0 5 Irated Blocking of the Function The following blockings reset the function completely Via the binary input signal Block function from an external or internal source ...

Page 968: ...t supervision function recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit When 2 binary inputs are used the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit If only 1 binary input is available it will not recognize disruptions at the circuit breaker The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the binary inputs VCtrl 2 VBImin At least 19 V...

Page 969: ...ip circuit and the outage of the control voltage It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker the binary inputs are either acti vated H or not L If both binary inputs are not activated there is a fault The fault may be a interruption or a short circuit ...

Page 970: ...ure shows the logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs lotcs2be 260912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 29 Logic Diagram of Trip Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs Trip Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input When using 1 binary input you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker The binary input is connected in parallel with the respective command relay of th...

Page 971: ...2 BI Dynamic State Static State 1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker 2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker 3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault 4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker Use the parameter Blk by trip open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip circuit super vis...

Page 972: ...e R must be dimensioned such that the circuit breaker coil is no longer activated when the circuit breaker is open Simultaneously the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is open In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input Rmax results in fofr1b02 090330 01 tif 1 en_US So that the circuit breaker coil does not remain activated Rmin results in fofr1...

Page 973: ... trip open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip circuit super vision is blocked The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip circuit supervision function The Trip open cmd of the circuit breaker is activated One of the trip commands of the circuit breaker failure protection is activated One of the trip commands of the circuit breaker reignition protection is activated T...

Page 974: ...Health ENS O _ 71 74TC sup 1BI Trip circuit failure SPS O _ 301 74TC sup 1BI Input sig not routed SPS O 74TC sup 2BI _ 82 74TC sup 2BI Block function SPS I _ 500 74TC sup 2BI Trip relay SPS I _ 503 74TC sup 2BI CB auxiliary contact SPS I _ 54 74TC sup 2BI Inactive SPS O _ 52 74TC sup 2BI Behavior ENS O _ 53 74TC sup 2BI Health ENS O _ 71 74TC sup 2BI Trip circuit failure SPS O _ 301 74TC sup 2BI I...

Page 975: ...lues magnitude phase Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device The device goes briefly out of opera tion Such errors are for example Memory error RAM in the base module Faulty module Module connection error PCB Link Control circuit error binary output Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage i i NOTE If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts the syst...

Page 976: ...ure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup the fast current measurement is based on instanta neous values For Analog digital converter supervision the neutral point current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th current measuring input IN The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the current transfor...

Page 977: ...ristic 2 Σ i Base point 2 With the current inputs iA iB iC and iN the device calculates The fault current IF iA iB iC iN The maximum current Σ i iA iB iC iN lokenisu 240413 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 8 34 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device Internal Analog Digital Converters 8 4 2 3 Supervision Functions 8 4 Supervision of the Device Hardware SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Man...

Page 978: ...ng range of the Supervision of the device internal analog digital converters function The threshold value is fixed to 10 of the device rated current Slope of the Characteristic 1 The component slope of characteristic 1 Σ i takes into account permissible current input errors which can occur in the case of small overcurrents The slope of characteristic 1 is fixed to 0 1 Slope of the Characteristic 2...

Page 979: ... 2 is fixed to 0 95 The base point of the slope of characteristic 2 is fixed to 10 Supervision Functions 8 4 Supervision of the Device Hardware SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 979 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 980: ...re state Such errors are for example errors in time synchronization loss and errors Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device The device goes briefly out of operation Such errors are for example Device startup with faulty new parameter set The old parameter set is still present Overloading of the processor Program sequence error Fatal firmware error The device goes perma...

Page 981: ...als data affected by the failure are marked as invalid In this way the affected protection functions can go into a secure state Such errors are for example errors in IE converter configura tion loss and errors Fatal configuration error The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state fallback mode Such errors are for example Missing hardware module module x Incorrect hardware modul...

Page 982: ...nctions can go into a secure state In the following some examples are named GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values both analog measured values and binary information to invalid for example for differential protection Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in cases of failures...

Page 983: ...vice Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure proceed step by step Step 1 Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases Defect severity 1 Internal or external device error that is reported The device stays in ...

Page 984: ...vailable for further analyses If super visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up there is a separate communication log available for each port Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there The device diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions There you also receive recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected devi...

Page 985: ...te is processed via the associated function group up to the general group indication Health _ 53 Check from the operational log from which function or function block the error originates In the associated func tion description there is additional information as to why the Health of the function or a function block can change _ 53 Health Warning SPS _ 53 Health Alarm SPS Device Supervision Function...

Page 986: ...the fault is not remedied contact the Customer Support Center Quality The internal time is marked with the quality attribute of Clock Failure _ 319 Error memory SPS Checksum CRC error in monitored memory areas of the device Measuring transducer error x ENS Hardware error on the measuring trans ducer module on plug in module posi tion E F M N P Contact the Customer Support Center Handling an alarm ...

Page 987: ...pport Center Transferred Signals Faulty or not received telegrams are detected at the receive end and discarded They do not result in failure of the applications Configured binary signals are reset after a time that can be set _ 303 Connection broken SPS CFC 26 _ 316 Error rate min exc SPS _ 317 Error rate hour exc SPS _ 318 Time delay exceeded SPS _ 320 Time delay jump SPS Line 1 Mess Volt Fail d...

Page 988: ... Customer Support Center Defect Severity 3 Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode The signal _ 301 Device status goes to the Alarm state The Warning state is not supported for this signal Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device In this case contact the Customer Support Center The dev...

Page 989: ...tion of the device with DIGSI Defect Severity 4 Group Alarm Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning These errors do not affect the device hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions The condition of the defect severity 4 the group alarm is set user specifically by the binary input signal _ 503 Group alarm If the binary inp...

Page 990: ...recorded in the operational log Depending on the cause of the initiation further information can be found in the operational log You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3 Supervision Functions 8 8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 990 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 991: ... 503 Group Alarm is reset the signal _ 300 Group alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state In the delivery condition every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive that initiates the Group Alarm This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning mode You can adapt the CFC chart as needed You can find the CFC chart ...

Page 992: ... 505 Group indication is set the indication _ 302 Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log In the delivery condition there is no further response of the device If the binary input signal is reset the signal _ 302 Group indication drops out Via a CFC chart you can define when the binary input signal _ 505 Group indication is to be set Supervision Functions 8 9 Group In...

Page 993: ...mental and Symmetrical Components 999 9 5 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1000 9 6 Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring 1020 9 7 Average Values 1037 9 8 Minimum Maximum Values 1040 9 9 Energy Values 1042 9 10 User Defined Metered Values 1045 9 11 Statistic Values 1049 9 12 Measuring Transducers 1050 9 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 993 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 994: ...ctions for recording and editing process data can be found in the chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device dwomverf 010212 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 1 Structure of Measured Value Acquisition and Processing For the display the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups Operational measured values Fundamental and symmetrical components Function specific measured v...

Page 995: ...ue groups dwstrciv 011012 01 tif 1 en_US The Minimum values Maximum values Average values and User defined values can be inserted from the library into the Voltage Current 3 phase function group Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters Circuit Breaker Function Group The Circuit breaker function group may contain the following measu...

Page 996: ...ction for the protection functions and the positive direction for the powers etc differently for example such that the active power import from the line to the busbar is displayed positively Then set the option P Q sign in the affected function groups on the reversed parameter With the parameter not reversed default setting the positive direction for the powers etc corresponds with the forward dir...

Page 997: ...ting current of the primary values 3I0 Calculated zero sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary values IN Neutral point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values VA VB VC Phase to ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values 3 VAB VBC VCA Phase to phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values V0 Calculated zero sequence ...

Page 998: ...MVA Apparent power of the phase Vrated phsx Irated phsx i i NOTE With the P Q sign parameter in the function block General of the respective function group the sign of the following measured values can be inverted Active power total P total Active power phase related PA PB PC Reactive power total Q total Reactive power phase related QA QB and QC Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the...

Page 999: ...ase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values I N Neutral point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values Symmetrical Components Table 9 3 Symmetrical Components Values Primary Secon dary Phase Angle Referenced to V 0 Zero sequence component of the voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values 3 V 1 Positive sequence component of the voltage kV V Rat...

Page 1000: ...ith additional values via the communication module to a server PDC Phasor Data Concentrator dwstrpmu 250613 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 9 2 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The synchrophasors sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC are provided with time stamps and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs The power frequency the power frequency ch...

Page 1001: ...r communication with the substation automation technology for example through the IEC 61850 protocol The central evaluation system e g SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor receives the data files archives them and graphically displays them on a User Interface In this system a self checking function may also be performed for example on undamped power swings The further distribution of information to o...

Page 1002: ...n having a rated frequency which is synchronized with the UTC time reference see Figure 9 5 dwutcphi 260112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 5 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 5 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1002 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 1...

Page 1003: ...n the actual and the measured values of the input signal The Synchro phasor Standard IEEE 37 118 defines upper limiting values of 120 VN and 200 IN among other things Up to these limiting values the TVE of 1 must not be exceeded for stationary signals The standard defines the 2 performance classes Class P and Class M as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable and the TVE of 1 must...

Page 1004: ...al Variables that influence the TVE are Amplitude errors Phase errors Synchronization accuracy deviation from the UTC Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the GPS receiver module as well as by the optimal setup of the GPS antenna Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 5 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 100...

Page 1005: ...ator functions as both the client and the server Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been queried the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU If you use the method of spontaneous transmission via UDP data output starts immediately after the device boots without a close command to the PM...

Page 1006: ...mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode In asynchronous response mode data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37 118 format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the PMU Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time The IP addresses of the maximum 3 PD...

Page 1007: ...odules Addressing You must configure the respective Ethernet address IP address subnet mask etc for each communication module in DIGSI This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU scethern 210415 1 en_US Figure 9 8 Ethernet Address Configuration In the DIGSI properties dialog f...

Page 1008: ... for the communication module an advanced settings dialog for PMU specific configuration opens see the following figure Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 5 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1008 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1009: ...ommanded operation These placeholders allow you to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses The purpose of this is to permit each individual device or system access within the respective system without limits with regard to their hierarchy level Therefore with regard to security aspects the limitation to individual IP addresses is elimi nated You are thus allowe...

Page 1010: ...to connect is rejected If you have configured IP address 0 0 0 0 and the placeholder 255 255 255 255 every IP address received is accepted as valid This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures i i NOTE You must have configured at least 1 IP address in order to establish a connection between the device and PDC If you use the asynchronous data transmission method set the PMU transfer...

Page 1011: ...ubnetwork destination address cannot be reached EXAMPLE COM Module Address Configuration IP address 192 168 100 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 PDC Address Configuration IP address for PDC1 192 168 100 160 IP address for PDC2 86 168 100 161 Only PDC1 receives the data because the IP address is in the same subnetwork as that of the COM module PDC2 cannot be reached because the subnetwork address 86 x d...

Page 1012: ...are 2 x 3 phase voltage measuring points 2 x 3 phase current measuring points 2 x 1 phase voltage measuring points 2 x 1 phase current measuring points You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU see the following figure However each PMU must be connected to a 3 phase voltage measuring point Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 5 Phasor Measurement Uni...

Page 1013: ... in the IEEE C37 118 interface can be changed The function block designations themselves cannot The IEEE C37 118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names in the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 PMU support Due to the protocol the designation length is limited to 16 ASCII characters per channel However when renaming you have to assign at least 1 character The renaming of binary channel...

Page 1014: ...r CFC information with binary channels of the PMU via DIGSI information routing You will find in the Phasor Measurement Unit PMU folder the Binary information transmission function block in the DIGSI function library see the following figure You can instantiate this function block up to 10 times in one PMU function group Each of these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary channels ...

Page 1015: ...he Device You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device To do this select the desired PMU instance on the device display By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values see Figure 9 18 Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed because this corresponds to the physical slot position of the communication module in question 9 5 7 Measured Values Energy Va...

Page 1016: ...on the device display From the Channel 1 menu item you can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings see Figure 9 19 sccompmu 1 en_US Figure 9 19 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 5 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1016 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manua...

Page 1017: ...ue thus to 1 s Parameter Mode Default setting _ 10621 1 Mode on Activate and deactivate the PMU or switch to Test mode via the parameter Mode The possible setting values are on off and test In Test mode the PMU data is marked as invalid Parameter Reporting rate Default setting _ 10621 102 Reporting rate 10 frames s With the parameter Reporting rate you specify the number of telegrams that are comp...

Page 1018: ...s parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding communication module is inserted Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Func settings _ 10621 1 Func settings Mode off on test on _ 10621 101 Func settings Class Class P Class M Class P _ 10621 102 Func settings Reporting rate 1 frame s 5 frames s 6 frames s 10 frames s 12 frame...

Page 1019: ...ings Phasor 2 Freely editable text _ 10621 115 Func settings Phasor 3 Freely editable text _ 10621 117 Func settings Phasor Freely editable text Meas point I 3ph _ 10621 118 Func settings Meas uring point ID 0to0 0 _ 10621 119 Func settings Phasor 1 Freely editable text _ 10621 120 Func settings Phasor 2 Freely editable text _ 10621 121 Func settings Phasor 3 Freely editable text _ 10621 123 Func ...

Page 1020: ...measuring methods ΣIx method stage Sum of tripping current powers 2P method stage 2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles I2t method stage Sum of all squared fault current integrals Supv CB make time stage Supervision of the circuit breaker make time The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 ΣIx method stage A maximum of 1 ΣIx method stage 1 2P method stage 1 ...

Page 1021: ... Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring Func tion Start Criterion for the Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring Function The Circuit breaker wear monitoring function starts when any of the following criteria is fulfilled Internal protection function tripping signal from the function block Trip logic is received Open command signal from the internal Contro...

Page 1022: ...mental components are used for comparing the threshold values When the current criterion fulfills the requirement of the phase selective logic release the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are initiated End Criterion for the Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring Function After calculation and evaluation have been completed the end criterion of the circuit breaker maintenance is fulfil...

Page 1023: ...sing procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows You can find more information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 101 General CB opening time 0 001 s to 0 500 s 0 065 s _ 2311 102 General CB break time 0 001 s to 0 600 s 0 080 s _ 2311 103 General CB...

Page 1024: ... in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh CB open The 20 ms prior value is used as tripping opening current for further calculation If no value within the buffer is above the setting value this circuit breaker opening affects only the mechan ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method 9 6 4 9 6 4 1 Measure...

Page 1025: ...normal current to the power of x Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the Ix method m Total number of switching cycles The phase selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value You can reset or preset the statistics according to the specific application To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers the values are set in relation to the exponentiated r...

Page 1026: ...cuit breaker whose contacts have not yet been worn the maximum number of make break operations can be entered directly as limiting value Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting ΣIx method _ 11371 1 ΣIx method Mode off on test off _ 11371 101 ΣIx method Exponent 1 0 to 3 0 2 0 _ 11371 102 ΣIx method Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type...

Page 1027: ...tted switching cycles and the tripping opening current see the following figure According to the example this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA 2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current Point P1 is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated Point...

Page 1028: ...e between P1 and P2 can be expressed by the following exponential function FoCBW2P1 301012 01 tif 1 en_US Where Itrip Tripping opening current Irated Rated normal current m Slope coefficient b Switching cycles at rated normal current n Number of switching cycles The general line equation for the double logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func tion and leads to the coeffi...

Page 1029: ... release signal the current number of used up switching cycles in relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current is calculated based on the determined trip ping current This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime switching cycles The remaining life time is available as statistic value For better understanding refer to the example below You can reset or preset the s...

Page 1030: ...arning signal is gener ated Application and Setting Notes Parameter Switching cycles at Ir Default setting _ 101 Switching cycles at Ir 10 000 You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker Parameter Rated short circ cur Isc De...

Page 1031: ...hreshold value based on the following calcu lation FoCBW2P4 301012 01 tif 1 en_US Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting 2P method _ 1 2P method Mode off on test off _ 101 2P method Switching cycles at Ir 100 to 1000000 10000 _ 102 2P method Rated short circ cur Isc 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A _ 103 2P method Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 50 _ 104 2P method Threshold 0 to 10000...

Page 1032: ...n the 2 settings of parameters CB break time and CB opening time see also Figure 9 23 The stage determines the ending point of the arc time by searching backward the zero crossing point of the phase currents after it receives the logic release signal Then the squared fault currents during the arc time are integrated phase 9 6 6 9 6 6 1 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary S...

Page 1033: ... setting _ 101 Threshold 10 000 00 I Ir s You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured values of the phase currents Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting I2t method _ 1 I2t method Mode off on test off _ 101 I2t method Threshold 0 00 I Ir s to 21400000 00 I Ir s 10000 00 I Ir s Information List No Information Data Class Ty...

Page 1034: ...o 0 and marked with the quality invalid If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper current threshold or the param eter Current thresh CB open at the time of the circuit breaker closing command the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time W...

Page 1035: ...ws the end of the time interval Make time is detected Parameter Delay correction time Default setting _ 104 Delay correction time 0 000 s With the parameter Delay correction time you define a correction value which will be subtracted from the Make time during calculation This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system for example relay residual times if necessary Settings Addr Parameter ...

Page 1036: ..._ 53 Supv CB mak t Health ENS O _ 301 Supv CB mak t Make time MV O _ 302 Supv CB mak t Warning 1 SPS O _ 303 Supv CB mak t Warning 2 SPS O 9 6 7 4 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 6 Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring 1036 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1037: ... sign of the following measured values of the respective function group can be inverted see Chapter 9 2 Structure of the Function Structure of the Function section Inversion of Output Related Measured and Statistical Values Active power total P total Reactive power total Q total Application and Setting Notes for Average Values The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the...

Page 1038: ...rval 60 min Average update interval 30 min Average synchroniz time hh 15 A new average value is formed every 30 min at hh 15 15 min after the top of the hour and hh 45 15 min before the top of the hour All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation If these settings are changed to 11 03 25 for instance the average values are first reset and appears in the ...

Page 1039: ... average value If these settings are changed to 11 03 25 for instance the average values are first reset and appears in the display The 1st average value is then formed at 11 10 00 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 7 Average Values SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1039 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1040: ...tting Min Max reset each and setting Min Max reset minute Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum maximum values begins after the parameterization Setting Min Max days until start The following figure shows the effect of the settings dwminmax 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 31 Minimum and Maximum Value Formation Minimum and maximum values are time stamped Minimum maximum ...

Page 1041: ...clic reset yes Parameter Value Description Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is activated No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deactivated None of the following parameters are visible Parameter Min Max reset each Default setting _ 108 Min Max reset each 1 day Parameter Value Description 1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value an...

Page 1042: ...til the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu nication interface of the device After this it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log Note The transfer interval is used alternatively to the transfer time and deactivates the set transfer time The display of the device is always up to date You will find these parameters in the device settings under measure...

Page 1043: ...fect and will be deactivated automatically Parameter Energy restore time Default setting _ 112 Energy restore time none Parameter Value Description none Deactivated hh 00 Restoring on the full hour hh 15 Restoring 15 minutes after the full hour hh 30 Restoring 30 minutes after the full hour hh 45 Restoring 45 minutes after the full hour Note If the parameter is activated through a time setting the...

Page 1044: ...n 30 min 60 min Input Signals Restoring and Resetting Binary Inputs Description Restoring The restoring of the metered values is initiated via a binary input Reset The metered value memory is set to 0 through the binary input You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix Open the function group for example Line where you created the energy value There under the tab Measured values yo...

Page 1045: ...ternal internal pulse generator is connected to the device via a routable binary input Pulse input If this does not deliver any plausible values this can be signaled to the device via another routable binary input External error In compliance with IEC 61850 in the event of an external error the quality of the pulse metered value changes to the state Questionable No more pulses are added as long as...

Page 1046: ...gs and binary inputs are available Parameter Restore time Default setting _ 101 Restore time none Parameter Value Description none Deactivated hh 00 Transfer on the full hour hh 15 Transfer 15 minutes after the full hour Note hh 30 Transfer 30 minutes after the full hour Note hh 45 Transfer 45 minutes after the full hour Note Note If the parameter is activated through a time setting the parameter ...

Page 1047: ...sing edge at the binary input resets the pulse counter to 0 The amount of energy indicated by a pulse generator is to be displayed as a measured value 1 pulse corresponds to 100 Wh The pulse weighting the SI unit and the factor must be adjusted to one another Display value Calculated metered value Pulse weighting Factor SI unit If the check box Restore delta value is activated the differential val...

Page 1048: ...1 en_US Figure 9 33 Setting with DIGSI Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 10 User Defined Metered Values 1048 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1049: ... breaking currents Sum of the primary breaking currents separately for each breaker pole Hours with open circuit breaker Hours under load The following values are available for each disconnector switch Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device separately for each switch p...

Page 1050: ...onfigurable independently of each other dwstrumu 050313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 34 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The 20 mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a pressure Therefore the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the 20 mA value If the parameter Range active is...

Page 1051: ...s for Example 1 If a value smaller than 24 mA or larger than 24 mA is applied to the measuring transducer input the meas ured value is marked as invalid If the parameter Range active is activated the 2 additional parameters Upper limit and Lower limit appear Both limiting values indicate the input currents in mA for which the value set by the Conversion factor Upper limit and the value 0 Lower lim...

Page 1052: ...from 24 mA to 24 mA The param eter Upper limit Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting The parameter Lower limit Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting dwklges2 120124 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 9 38 Total Characteristic Curve in Example 2 Measured Values En...

Page 1053: ...easured value resolution Parameter Range active Default setting _ 107 Range active false If you do not activate the Range active setting no x in the check box the function operates over the range 24 mA to 24 mA The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 20 mA to 20 mA If you activate the Range active setting then 4 additional settings Upper limit Upper limit Sensor L...

Page 1054: ...ting MT in _ 101 MT in Meas transduc I O type Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Temperature input Current input _ 103 MT in Unit C F Ω Ω km Ω mi 1 s A As cos φ cycles dB F km F mi h Hz Hz s in J J Wh K l s m mi min p u Pa periods rad rad s s V V Hz VA VAh var varh Vs W W s Wh m 9 12 5 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 12 Measuring Transdu...

Page 1055: ...er limit Sensor 10000 to 10000 100 _ 106 MT in Lower limit 20 00 mA to 20 00 mA 4 00 mA _ 110 MT in Lower limit Sensor 10000 to 10000 100 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type MT in _ 301 MT in TD scale MV MV O _ 302 MT in TD direct MV MV O 9 12 6 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 9 12 Measuring Transducers SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Man...

Page 1056: ...1056 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1057: ...ties Current and Voltage Connection 1066 10 5 Circuit Breaker Test 1067 10 6 Testing the Negative Sequence Current 1071 10 7 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection 1072 10 8 Functional Test of the Trip Circuit Supervision 1074 10 9 Functional Test for the Phase Rotation Reversal 1075 10 10 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control 1076 10 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1057 C5...

Page 1058: ...hey provide a theoretical check of the setting values only Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems with the operation of the system and with safety regulations and provisions switching grounding etc Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning The described tests require that these be capable of bei...

Page 1059: ...switched through activate the operating mode Close cmd at V1 V2 Make sure that the fault recorder is turned on Via a temporary CFC chart link the signal Release close cmd of the active synchronization stage to the binary input signal Manual start of the fault recorder With the release of closure a fault record of the parameterized duration is set up the default setting of 500 ms is more than adequ...

Page 1060: ...eat the attempt Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several 3 to 5 successful switching attempts i i NOTE Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time This exclusively depends in good approximation on the binary output used for the close command You can find the switching times for the different binary outputs in the Technical data Set the total time with ...

Page 1061: ...easuring points Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function The delta values must be 0 Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values for the voltage Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured value for the frequency Blind Switching Attempts when Used in Machines...

Page 1062: ...ion stage for example externally with binary input signal or via the integrated controller Check the proper release for activation with the message log or via a fault record You have to start the fault recording explicitly All activation conditions have to be fulfilled within the time Delay close command If you observe the change between synchronous and asynchronous operation raise the changeover ...

Page 1063: ...tion it must be ensured that the protection external protection device or device internal protection functions cannot operate the circuit breaker The corresponding trip command must be interrupted Although the following list does not claim to be complete it can also contain points which have to be ignored in the current application Test Modes The device and the function can be switched to test mod...

Page 1064: ...erate the trip for the protection function This can be generated within the device by a test sequence see description in the Operating manual or by creating corresponding secondary test values The trip command s and their time delay compared to the pickup depending on the parameterization External Starting Conditions Trip Command from External Protection Function If external protection devices are...

Page 1065: ... circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which the feeder with the fault is connected A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers depends largely on the system topology With multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked The test has to check for every busbar...

Page 1066: ... or DIGSI 5 make sure that it corresponds to the power direc tion P is positive if the active power flows in the line or protected object P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected obj...

Page 1067: ...er is below the parameterizable threshold value i i NOTE If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected a circuit breaker that has been opened may be permanently closed The following test programs are available for you to carry out the circuit breaker test 1 pole tests are only possible if the respective circuit breaker is capable of being opened on 1 pole No Test Program 1 3 phase op...

Page 1068: ...st Parameters Figure 10 6 shows the chronological sequence of an open closed cycle as an example If you have activated the Open only option the close command is not executed and the dead time not taken into consideration If a circuit breaker auxiliary contact is connected the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi tion open after the trip command is generated When the indication Po...

Page 1069: ...orm a synchrocheck even if the synchrocheck has been configured in the protection function groups for circuit breakers This may cause stability problems in the system during a 3 pole interruption Therefore a 3 pole circuit breaker test should be very short or not performed at all under load You can start the test program as follows Via the device control panel Via DIGSI Via communication protocols...

Page 1070: ... the bottom portion of the working area Additional informa tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit breaker test is being performed can be read in the operational log Functional Tests 10 5 Circuit Breaker Test 1070 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1071: ... a setting of 10 the primary negative sequence current is 80 A 10 100 8 A For a current transformer ratio of 100 test with a secondary current of 0 08 A With a transformer of 100 A 5 A the test current is higher by the factor 5 Test with 0 4 A The pickup value is at 1 1 0 4 A 0 44 A If deviations occur during the testing you must check whether the power system data were entered correctly i i NOTE ...

Page 1072: ...esults in a secondary current of 724 5 A 1A 750A 0 966 A A secondary current of 0 966 A must therefore be supplied Calculate the operate time with the following formula Enter only primary variables here Set Iprevious load 0 The setting parameters reveal the K factor for example 1 1 and the Thermal time constant for example 600 s or 10 min Test from the cold state foauslpr 190309 01 tif 2 en_US At ...

Page 1073: ...s are carried out with significantly reduced time constants Reset the original setting value after completing the tests Functional Tests 10 7 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1073 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1074: ... sure that the binary inputs used are isolated 1 Binary Input Make sure that in the circuit of the 2nd circuit breaker auxiliary contact an equivalent resistance R is connected Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R 10 8 Functional Tests 10 8 Functional Test of the Trip Circuit Supervision 1074 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edit...

Page 1075: ...orrespond to the phase sequence that was set You can also determine the phase sequence via the Symmetrical components measured values If you obtain negative sequence system variables V2 I2 and no positive sequence system variables V1 I1 with symmetrical 3 phase infeed the setting parameter Phase sequence does not correspond to the connection 10 9 Functional Tests 10 9 Functional Test for the Phase...

Page 1076: ... sure that no other measurands are connected and that the trip commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted Otherwise the circuit breaker may be activated If the tap changer position is not updated manually during the secondary test you must deactivate the tap changer supervision Otherwise the voltage control is blocked after every switching procedure i i NOTE Once you have completed the secon...

Page 1077: ...The display then indicates an invalid tap position with Figure 10 9 You can find information on which conditions lead to an invalid tap position in the section Adjusting Command Monitoring Page 439 sc_osop_valid_position 1 en_US Figure 10 9 Invalid Tap Changer Position in the Device Display Parameterize BCD Code If the tap position of the tap changer is transmitted to the SIPROTEC 5 device via BCD...

Page 1078: ...ve binary input is marked with a cross in the device menu under the entry Binary IO Siemens recom mends driving through all positions of the tap changer completely if possible thereby testing the correct tap changer position indication once the parameterization of the tap position detection is finished and the tap position display is activated You can carry out the tap position check from the on s...

Page 1079: ...fter every switching procedure i i NOTE Once you have completed the secondary test you must activate the tap changer supervision again Check of the Voltage Control Function The measured control deviation D results from the following formula fo_ibs_regelab 1 en_US where Vact prim Actual voltage primary Vtarget prim 90V V contr 2w Target voltage primary Vrated 90V V contr 2w General Rated voltage If...

Page 1080: ...Vact sec 47 1 V 3 81 5 V Check the output of the Higher adjusting command after the parameterizable time T1 With a set bandwidth B of 1 this results in the secondary pickup value Voltage transformer connection phase to ground Vact sec 46 1 V Voltage transformer connection phase to phase Vact sec 46 1 V 3 79 8 V Check the output of the Lower adjusting command after the parameterized time Fast step ...

Page 1081: ...e line at rated current according to the setting notes in 6 9 4 4 Line Compensation this results in a setting value of 4 8 The secondary current to be fed in at a load current for the 100 load case results in fo_ibs_load_current 1 en_US where ICT prim Power system CT 3 phase Rated primary current ICT sec Power system CT 3 phase Rated secondary current Irated Voltage cont 2w General Rated current T...

Page 1082: ...oltage Vload and the flowing current Iact prim fo_ibs_volt_prim_calcul 1 en_US with IΔVI Iact prim cosφ R sinφ X If you insert the target voltage Vtarget in the formula instead of Vload for the resulting control deviation this results in D 0 Check whether the operational measured value ΔV has the value 0 via the on site operation panel or in DIGSI If you set the previous example values and if you ...

Page 1083: ...entical for 2 voltage controllers Master error number of Masters in the group 1 only with the Master Follower method Measured value invalid for example with line compensation no current transformer assigned in the remote voltage controller Mode error inconsistent test mode of the voltage controllers You can find the reason for the indication in the operational log of the indication Cause of par op...

Page 1084: ...the test items of the voltage controller function in the chapter 10 10 1 1 General in the Master device i i NOTE During this test note that the measured control voltage Vact m is averaged from the measured voltages of all parallel voltage controllers and therefore the secondary voltage must be fed in for all voltage control lers Checking the Line Compensation To check the Z Compensation LDC Z proc...

Page 1085: ...ent Irated 1430 A 2859 A Target voltage Vtarget 11 kV 11 kV Target voltage rising 4 8 9 6 Based on the following table check the input currents and voltages for each voltage controller Transformer T1 Independent T2 off I2 0 Transformer T2 Independent T1 off I1 0 Transformer T1 Master Transformer T2 Follower Input values secondary Isec 0 953 A 2 383 A 0 635 A 3 1833 A Phase to ground Vsec 33 198 V ...

Page 1086: ... Total susceptance value Xk Transformer reactance on transformer k The control deviation DCRCk resulting from the circulating reactive current is determined in the voltage controller numerically according to the following formula fo_regelabwdcc 1 en_US The primary current to be fed in at a desired control deviation DCRCk results as follows fo_ibs_regelabwd_ccm 1 en_US The current to be fed in is c...

Page 1087: ... Infeed Transformer T2 for D 1 Input values secon dary T1 T2 T1 T2 Isec 0 09622 A 90 ph gnd 150 ph ph 0 A 0 A 0 4041 A 90 ph gnd 150 ph ph Phase to ground Vsec 31 754 V 57 735 V 31 754 V 57 735 V Phase to phase Vsec 55 V 100 V 55 V 100 V Functional measured values Vact 11 0 kV 11 0 kV 11 0 kV 11 0 kV Iload 144 A 0 A 0 A 243 A Phase angle 90 0 Iload 144 A 144 A 243 A 243 A ICRC 90 A 90 A 91 A 91 A ...

Page 1088: ...e is a doubt open meshed or ring systems The line or the protected object remains switched on for the duration of the measurements You can derive the direction directly from the operational measured values Make sure in DIGSI 5 or on the device with the following path that the power measured values corre spond to the power direction Main menu Measured Values Voltage cont 2w Power values If active p...

Page 1089: ...operation are the commissioning of the voltage controller in single operation and that the secondary tests have been completed For the functional test the voltage controllers must be in the same parallel group according to the topology and the Manual mode as well as the Method of minimizing the circulating reactive current must be acti vated In most cases the default setting of the parameter React...

Page 1090: ...lers Since the transformer reactance can change slightly with the tap position the points with maximum and minimum tap position mentioned in the preceding section are used to check the stable control Checking the Tap Direction and the Set Bandwidth in Parallel Operation with the Master Follower Method The following prerequisites apply for the following test All transformers are switched on All tra...

Page 1091: ...ring point 1 against measuring point 2 For transformers it is assumed that side 1 is the upper voltage side of the transformer The other possible current circuits are tested in an analog way Read the differential and restraint currents under Main menu Measured values Check the direction information of the _ 302 Ground fault indication in the fault log or in the ground fault log The direction infor...

Page 1092: ...1092 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1093: ...rotection with 3 Phase Voltage 1150 11 18 Overvoltage Protection with Positive Sequence Voltage 1152 11 19 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1153 11 20 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 1155 11 21 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1158 11 22 Overfrequency Protection 1159 11 23 Underfrequency Protection 1160 11 24 Underfrequency Load Shedding 1161 11 25 Rate of Frequency Cha...

Page 1094: ...ase Rotation Supervision 1189 11 42 Voltage Phase Rotation Supervision 1190 11 43 Trip Circuit Supervision 1191 11 44 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum 1192 11 45 Measuring Voltage Failure Detection 1193 11 46 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 1195 11 47 Energy Values 1199 11 48 CFC 1200 Technical Data 1094 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C...

Page 1095: ...ls DC 20 V Galvanic separation from ground housing DC 700 V Permissible overload DC 100 mA continuously Measurement repetition 200 ms Measuring Transducer Inputs via Module ARC CD 3FO Connector type AVAGO AFBR 4526Z Number of transceivers 3 Fiber type Polymer Optical Fiber POF 1 mm Receiver Maximum 10 dBm 2 dBm Minimum 40 dBm 2 dBm Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm Attenuation In the case of plastic opti...

Page 1096: ...inuously IO210 MT3 terminal point C9 Measurement repetition 62 5 μs Insulation class IO210 ELV Extra Low Voltage acc to IEC 60255 27 Insulation class IO212 SELV acc to IEC 60255 27 Table 11 2 High Speed Measuring Transducer Inputs Current Differential current input channels IO210 429 IO212 830 Measuring range DC 20 mA to 20 mA Fault 0 5 of the measuring range Input impedance current 12 Ω Conversio...

Page 1097: ...V AC 80 V to AC 265 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Auxiliary rated voltage VH PS201 PS203 CB202 DC 24 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 125 V DC 220 V DC 250 V or AC 100 V AC 115 V AC 230 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Permissible voltage ranges PS101 Only for non modular devices DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to 150 V DC 88 V to DC 300 V AC 80 V to AC 265 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Auxiliary rated voltage VH PS101 Only for non modular devices DC 24 V...

Page 1098: ...ular devices For V DC 24 V 50 ms For V DC 110 V 50 ms For V AC 115 V 50 ms Stored energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or short circuit non modular devices For V DC 24 V 20 ms For V DC 60 V DC 110 V 50 ms For V AC 115 V 200 ms Binary Inputs Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar with the exception of the binary inputs on the IO230 the IO231 and the IO2...

Page 1099: ...ge 250 V Permissible current per contact continuous 5 A Permissible current per contact switching on and holding 30 A for 1 s make contact Short time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms Total permissible current for contacts connected to common potential 5 A Switching time OOT Output Operating Time Additional delay of the output medium used Make time typical 8 ms maximum 10 ms Break time...

Page 1100: ...A Switching time OOT Output Operating Time Additional delay of the output medium used Make time typical 0 2 ms maximum 0 2 ms Break time typical 9 ms maximum 9 ms Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with UL certification B150 Q300 Power Relay for Direct Control of Motor Switches Switching capacity for permanent and periodic operation 250 V 4 0 A 220 V 4 5 A 110 V 5 0 A 60 V 5 0 A 48 V ...

Page 1101: ... kg 7 2 kg 9 9 kg 12 7 kg 15 5 kg Surface mounted device with inte grated on site operation panel 7 4 kg 11 7 kg 15 9 kg 20 2 kg 24 5 kg Surface mounted device with detached on site operation panel 4 7 kg 7 8 kg 10 8 kg 13 9 kg 17 0 kg Size Weight Detached on site operation panel 1 3 1 9 kg Detached on site operation panel 1 6 1 1 kg Device Size Weight of the Non Modular Devices 7xx82 Type of cons...

Page 1102: ...m 2 95 x 10 55 x 9 02 Surface mounted device with integrated on site oper ation panel 75 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm 2 95 x 12 36 x 13 27 Surface mounted device with detached on site opera tion panel 75 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm 2 95 x 12 36 x 9 06 Plug In Module Dimensions Type of Construction Maximum Dimensions Width x Height x Depth in Inches USART Ax xEL ETH Bx xEL 61 mm x 45 mm x 120 5 mm 2 4 x 1 77 x 4 ...

Page 1103: ...inal Voltage Terminal with Spring Loaded Terminals Voltage Terminal with Screw Connection Stranded wires with ring type lug 2 7 Nm No ring type lug No ring type lug Stranded wires with boot lace ferrules or pin type lugs 2 7 Nm 1 0 Nm 0 6 Nm Solid conductor bare 2 mm2 2 0 Nm 1 0 Nm i i NOTE Use copper cables only Torques for Other Screw Types Screw Type Torque M4 x 20 1 2 Nm M4 x 8 1 2 Nm M2 5 x 6...

Page 1104: ...ct connection Transmission rate 2048 kbit s Connection via communication networks Supported network interfaces G703 1 with 64 kbit s G703 T1 with 1 455 Mbit s G703 E1 with 2 048 Mbit s X 21 with 64 kbit s or 128 kbit s or 512 kbit s Pilot wires with 128 kbit s Transmission rate 64 kbit s at G703 1 1 455 Mbit s at G703 T1 2 048 Mbit s at G703 E1 512 kbit s or 128 kbit s or 64 kbit s at X 21 128 kbi...

Page 1105: ...36 Response time total approx For 2 ends Minimum Typical 100 ms For 3 ends Minimum Typical 150 ms For 6 ends Minimum Typical 200 ms Dropout times total approx For 2 ends Typical 100 ms For 3 ends Typical 150 ms For 6 ends Typical 200 ms 36 Times cannot be determined because the signals are transmitted in fragments Technical Data 11 2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology SIPROTEC 5 High Vol...

Page 1106: ...ilure indication after 0 s to 3600 s Time zone and daylight saving time Manually setting the time zones Time zone offset with respect to GMT 720 min to 840 min Switching over to daylight saving time Active Inactive Beginning of daylight saving time Input day and time End of daylight saving time Input day and time Offset daylight saving time 0 min to 120 min steps of 15 11 3 37 If provided Technica...

Page 1107: ...h trip command with Pickup Reaction to evolving faults Blocks automatic reclosing function Start evolving fault dead time Action times separated for all cycles 0 00 s to 300 00 s or oo ineffec tive Increments of 0 01 s Dead times after trip command separated for all types and all cycles 0 00 s to 1 800 00 s or oo ineffec tive Increments of 0 01 s Dead time after evolving fault detection separated ...

Page 1108: ...or Measurements IEEE Std C37 118 1aTM 2014 Data Transfer IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor Data transfer IEEE Std C37 118 2TM 2011 11 5 Technical Data 11 5 Phasor Measurement Unit 1108 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1109: ... circuit breaking current Isc 10 to 100 000 Increments of 1 Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Level of warning 1 1 to 100 Increments of 1 Level of warning 2 1 to 100 Increments of 1 Operating current threshold 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of ...

Page 1110: ... Approx 10 ms OOT 38 Tolerance Sequence tolerance for delay times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 11 7 38 OOT Output Operating Time additional delay of the output medium used for example 5 ms with fast relays see chapter 11 1 4 Relay Outputs Technical Data 11 7 External Trip Initiation 1110 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1111: ... Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec ...

Page 1112: ...10 mA Irated 1 A or 50 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value with filter for the gain of harmonics including compensation of the amplitude attenuation41 33 harmonics in relation to the fundamental component Up to 30 harmonic 1 5 of the setting value or 10 mA Irated ...

Page 1113: ... 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Dropout Disk emulation Instantaneous Time multiplier 0 00 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Pickup delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout 95 of 1 1 threshold value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transfor...

Page 1114: ... en_US Figure 11 1 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 11 8 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1114 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1115: ... en_US Figure 11 2 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 11 8 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1115 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1116: ... ANSI IEEE dwocpka1 080213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 11 3 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 11 8 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1116 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1117: ..._US Figure 11 4 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 11 8 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1117 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1118: ...igure 11 5 Tripping Characteristic Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 11 8 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1118 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1119: ...ponent Up to 30th harmonic 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value with filter for the compensation of the amplit...

Page 1120: ...ental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Stage with User Defined Characteristic Curve Setting Value for the Function Block Filter h 0 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 1 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 2 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 3 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 4 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 Setting Values for Protection Stage Metho...

Page 1121: ...er dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout 95 of 1 1 threshold value or 95 of the absolute pickup value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Reset of the Integration Timer Instantaneous W...

Page 1122: ... mA Irated 5 A frated 10 51 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 52 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Infl...

Page 1123: ...and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT54 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer i...

Page 1124: ...and 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Dropout Disk emulation Instantaneous Time multiplier 0 00 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Minimum time of the curve 0 00 s to 1 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dr...

Page 1125: ...ing to IEC Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms dwocpki1 080213 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 11 7 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 11 9 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1125 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1126: ...f 1 en_US Figure 11 8 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 11 9 Overcurrent Protection Ground 1126 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1127: ... ANSI IEEE dwocpka1 080213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 11 9 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 11 9 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1127 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1128: ...en_US Figure 11 10 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 11 9 Overcurrent Protection Ground 1128 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1129: ...en_US Figure 11 11 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 11 9 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1129 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1130: ...30th harmonic 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or...

Page 1131: ...ents of 0 01 Number of value pairs for the operate curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1 X values of the operate curve 1 00 p u to 20 00 p u Increments of 0 01 p u Y values of the operate curve 0 00 s to 999 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Number of value pairs for the dropout characteristic curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1 X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0 05 p u to 0 95 p u Increments of 0 01 p u Y ...

Page 1132: ...100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Operate Cur...

Page 1133: ...ntaneous Time multiplier 0 00 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Minimum time of the curve 0 00 to 1 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Additional time delay 0 00 to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio for the IEC ANSI Characteristic Curve Stage Type Inverse Time Disk emulation Approx 0 90 threshold value Time multiplier Approx 1 05 threshold value Approx 0 95 pickup value Setting Values for Stage Type wit...

Page 1134: ...tic Curve Figure 11 4 Moderately inverse Very inverse See chapter 11 8 2 Stage with Inverse Time Charac teristic Curve Figure 11 5 Extremely inverse Definite inverse See chapter 11 8 2 Stage with Inverse Time Charac teristic Curve Figure 11 6 Direction Determination Type With externally generated voltages With voltage memory 2 s Forward range Vref rot 88o Dropout differential forward reverse range...

Page 1135: ...p to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Definite time operate time 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Inverse time operate time according to IEC ANSI user defined characteristic curve 5 of the setting value or 2 current tolerance ...

Page 1136: ...alues for Stage Type Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection IEC ANSI Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI Dropout Disk emulation Instantaneous Time multiplier 0 00 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Minimum time of the curve 0 00 to 1 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Additional time delay 0 00 to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Values for Stage Type Inverse Time Overcur...

Page 1137: ...he characteristic curve 0 000 s to 60 000 s Increments of 0 001 s Additional time delay 0 000 s to 60 000 s Increments of 0 001 s dwloginv 300913 2 en_US Figure 11 13 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse Time Characteristic Dropout value for Stage Types Logarithmic Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Dropout ratio Approx 1 05 threshold value Approx 0 95 pickup value Setting Values for Stage Type L...

Page 1138: ...teristic Curve Overcurrent Protection Time multiplier 0 05 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 X values of the operate curve 1 00 p u to 66 67 p u Increments of 0 01 p u Y values of the operate curve 0 00 s to 999 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Number of value pairs for the dropout characteristic curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1 X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0 05 p u to 0 95 p u Increments of 0 01 ...

Page 1139: ... Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active with reduced sensitivity Tolerances Currents method of measurement fundamental component 1 of setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A Currents method of measurement RMS value 33 part of harmonic referring to fundamental component Up to 30th harmonic 1 of setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Ir...

Page 1140: ...ting value or 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Direction determination angle error 1º Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Technical Data 11 11 Directional Time Overcurrent Protection Ground 1140 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1141: ...ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly...

Page 1142: ...io If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time for current 2 2 threshold value Approx 8 ms OOT64 Tolera...

Page 1143: ...rated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 15 ms OOT66 at 50 Hz Approx 14 ms OOT at 60 Hz Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 17 ms OOT at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frat...

Page 1144: ...rated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Technical Data 11 14 Stage with Definite Time Characteristic Curve 1144 SIPROTEC 5...

Page 1145: ...es and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms The operate curves and dropout characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the Technical Data chapter under Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE The operate curve...

Page 1146: ... 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of m...

Page 1147: ...nts of 0 001 V Negative sequence voltage V2 0 300 V to 200 000 V Increments of 0 001 V Time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Duration of V seal in time 0 10 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Stages The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout Current 95 of 1 1 threshold value Volt...

Page 1148: ...Time Overcurrent Protection Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive Tolerances Currents method of measurement fundamental component 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value 33 part of harmonic in rel...

Page 1149: ...ess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Technical Data 11 16 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1149 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1150: ...0 Increments of 0 01 Characteristic constant k 0 00 to 300 00 Increments of 0 01 Characteristic constant α 0 010 to 5 000 Increments of 0 001 Characteristic constant c 0 000 to 5 000 Increments of 0 001 Time multiplier 0 05 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Reset time 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Operate Curve for Stage Type Inverse ...

Page 1151: ...pout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time Overvoltage Protection Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05 V Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse Time Overvoltage Prot...

Page 1152: ...ity Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT71 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05 V T...

Page 1153: ...r is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for the overvoltage and of 105 for the undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT74 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 ...

Page 1154: ...Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 11 19 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1154 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1155: ... A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Threshold 0 300 V to 175 000 V Increments of 0 001 V Pickup factor 0 80 to 1 00 Increments of 0 01 Characteristic constant k 0 00 to 300 00 Increments of 0 01 Chara...

Page 1156: ...ox 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive maintained Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the measurand beyond the dropout threshold Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time Undervoltage Protection Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05...

Page 1157: ...on class current transformers 1 of the setting value or 0 1 mA Irated 1 6 A or 0 5 mA Irated 8 A frated 10 valid for instrument transformers Operate time for 0 V VThresh 0 9 5 of the setting value or 30 ms Reset time delay 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 11 20 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1157 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition ...

Page 1158: ...ot available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for the overvoltage and of 105 for the undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT78 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Sli...

Page 1159: ...llowing 2 criteria is used Dropout differential derived from Dropout ratio 105 for the Minimum voltage parameter Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV secondary Operating Ranges Voltage range 5 V to 230 V phase phase Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 80 Hz Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz Tolerances Frequency f frated 0 20 Hz f frated 0 20 Hz 5 mHz at V Vrated frated 3 0 Hz f ...

Page 1160: ...llowing 2 criteria is used Dropout differential derived from Dropout ratio 105 for the Minimum voltage parameter Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV secondary Operating Ranges Voltage range 5 V to 230 V phase phase Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 80 Hz Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz Tolerances Frequency f frated 0 20 Hz f frated 0 20 Hz 5 mHz at V Vrated frated 3 0 Hz f ...

Page 1161: ...with stabilization counter 6 Approx 85 ms OOT81 at 50 Hz Approx 80 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 80 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 75 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout Frequency 0 01 Hz df dt rising rate and df dt falling rate 0 1 Hz s Voltage V1 105 of the threshold value Current I1 105 of the threshold va...

Page 1162: ...f the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Power angle 1 Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Technical Data 11 24 Underfrequency Load Shedding 1162 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C5300...

Page 1163: ... Pickup time Approx 160 ms OOT82 to 220 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 50 Hz Approx 140 ms OOT to 200 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 160 ms OOT to 220 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 50 Hz Approx 140 ms OOT to 200 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified to...

Page 1164: ...1 of the setting value or 10 ms Functional Measured Value Value Description df dt Calculated rate of frequency change Technical Data 11 25 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1164 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1165: ... OOT83 at 50 Hz Approx 45 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout times Approx 55 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 45 ms OOT at 60 Hz Tolerances Power 0 5 Srated 3 of setting value Srated rated apparent power Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Variables That Influence Pickup Values Auxiliary DC voltage in the range 0 8 VAux VAuxRated 1 15 1 Frequency in the range 0 95 f frated 1 05 1 Harmonics Up to 10 of 3rd harm...

Page 1166: ...Tripping delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Tolerances Times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 11 27 Technical Data 11 27 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 1166 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1167: ...tial pickup threshold dropout threshold of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential 95 of the pickup value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Circuit Breaker Supervision Position supervision via circuit breaker auxiliary con...

Page 1168: ...ly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances Threshold values dropout thresholds 2 of the setting value or 1 of the rated current Times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 11 28 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 1168 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1169: ...of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A Times Pickup times Approx 35 ms OOT Dropout times Approx 35 ms OOT Dropout Ratio Pickup value Approx 0 95 for I2 Iref 0 3 Operating Ranges Current range 0 05 x Irated obj all phase currents setting value Iph max Frequency range 10 Hz to 80 Hz Tolerances Pickup value I2 Irated obj Approx 2 of the setting value or 0 8 absolute ...

Page 1170: ...tial pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio Dropout differential of 3 of the object rated current Times Pickup time Approx 40 ms OOT85 at 50 Hz Approx 35 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 35 ms OOT Dropout Ratio Disk emulation Approx 0 90 threshold value Instantaneous Approx 1 05 threshold value Approx 0 95 pic...

Page 1171: ...rated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive Tolerances Reference value rated current Pickup value Approx 2 of the setting value or 0 8 of the absolute value Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the setting value or 2 of the current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of th...

Page 1172: ... 1 s Imax thermal 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Imin cooling 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 000 A to 10 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 00 A to 50 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6...

Page 1173: ...in relation to the fundamental component With reference to k Irated Up to 30th harmonic 2 or 10 mA Irated 1 A or 50 mA Irated 5 A 2 class acc to IEC 60255 887 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 4 or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A 4 class acc to IEC 60255 888 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 5 or 25 mA Irated 1 A or 125 mA Irated 5 A 5 class acc to IEC 60255 888 With reference to the operate t...

Page 1174: ... 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 11 15 Operate Curve of Overload Protection Technical Data 11 31 Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced 1174 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1175: ...0 s or Increments of 1 s Dropout Conditions Dropout differential 3 C or 6 F Tolerances Tripping delay 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Measured temperature value 0 5 of the setting value or 1 C or 2 F 11 32 Technical Data 11 32 Temperature Supervision SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1175 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1176: ...red values must be converted in the evaluation unit RTD Unit Ziehl TR1200 IP 7XV5662 8AD10 Max number of connected RTD units 4 Max number of sensors per RTD unit 12 Sensor type Pt 100 to EN 60751 connection of Ni 100 and Ni 120 sensors possible The measured values must be converted in the evaluation unit Temperature Measured Values Unit of measurement for temperature C or F adjustable Pt 100 199 C...

Page 1177: ...n 0 300 V to 340 000 V phase to phase Increments of 0 001 V V for off circuit conditions V for voltage present 0 300 V to 170 000 V phase to phase 0 300 V to 340 000 V phase to phase Increments of 0 001 V Increments of 0 001 V Differential values changeover thresholds asynchronous synchronous balancing Voltage differences V2 V1 V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V Increments of 0 001 V Frequency difference ...

Page 1178: ... 1 mHz Frequency of the voltage V1f2 Range Tolerance at rated frequency f2 in Hz 25 Hz f 70 Hz 1 mHz Voltage difference V2 V1 Range Tolerance at rated frequency In kV primary in V secondary or in Vrated Display always as phase to phase voltage in relation to side 1 10 to 120 of Vrated 1 of the measured value or 0 5 Vrated Frequency difference f2 f1 Range Tolerance at rated frequency In mHz frated ...

Page 1179: ... or 10 ms Tolerance of all time settings 10 ms Max phase displacement angle 5o for Δf 1 Hz 10o for Δf 1 Hz Technical Data 11 34 Synchronization Function SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1179 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1180: ...opout differential pickup threshold dropout threshold of the following 2 criteria is used Dropout differential derived from the Dropout ratio parameter If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies to the overcurrent protection and a dropout ratio of 105 applies to the undercurrent protection Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformers 15 mA sec I...

Page 1181: ...n T delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s Increments of 0 1 s Fast step up limit 50 0 to 0 0 Increments of 0 1 Fast step up T delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s Increments of 0 1 s Function monitoring 1 min to 120 min Increments of 1 min Line compensation LDC Z Target voltage rising 0 0 to 20 0 Increments of 0 1 Max load current 0 0 to 500 0 Increments of 0 1 Line compensation LDC XandR two winding transformer R line 0 00 Ω t...

Page 1182: ...erenced to the rated voltage of the controlled winding I load Current measured load current positive sequence system A A Load current referenced to the rated value of the function V max Maximum positive sequence voltage ever measured refer enced to phase to phase kV V Maximum voltage of the winding referenced to the rated voltage of the winding V min Minimum positive sequence voltage ever measured...

Page 1183: ...age ΔV act Voltage difference between the target voltage and the actual voltage Voltage difference referenced to the rated voltage of the controlled winding I load w1 Load current of winding 1 A A Load current referenced to the rated current of winding 1 I load w2 Load current of winding 2 A A Load current referenced to the rated current of winding 2 Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximu...

Page 1184: ... V Maximum voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 Vmax 2 Maximum voltage of winding 2 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 2 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 2 Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1 referenced to rated voltage of winding 1 Vmin 2 Minimum voltage of winding 2 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 2 referenced to rated voltage...

Page 1185: ...0 to 0 95 Increments of 0 01 Delay failure indication 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Overcurrent dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Undercurrent dropout ratio Approx 1 05 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 11 37 Technical Data 11 37 Current Balance Supervision SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1185 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1186: ...elay failure indication 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx 1 05 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 11 38 Technical Data 11 38 Voltage Balance Supervision 1186 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1187: ...1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Delay failure indication 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 11 39 Technical Data 11 39 Current Sum Supervision SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1187 C53000 G5040 C015 9 ...

Page 1188: ... failure indication 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 11 40 Technical Data 11 40 Voltage Sum Supervision 1188 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1189: ...100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Phase rotation direction A B C A C B Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 11 41 Technical Data 11 41 Current Phase Rotation Supervision SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1189 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1190: ...100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Phase rotation direction A B C A C B Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 11 42 Technical Data 11 42 Voltage Phase Rotation Supervision 1190 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1191: ...nary inputs Pickup and dropout time About 1 s to 2 s Adjustable indication delay with 1 binary input 1 00 s to 600 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Adjustable indication delay with 2 binary inputs 1 00 s to 600 00 s Increments of 0 01 s 11 43 Technical Data 11 43 Trip Circuit Supervision SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1191 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1192: ...ut time Approx 100 ms Blockings Blocked functions All functions that process the measured values from this current meas uring point for example differential protection 11 44 Technical Data 11 44 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum 1192 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1193: ...ilable a dropout ratio of 95 applies to the overvoltage protection and a dropout ratio of 105 applies to the undervoltage protection Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Pickup time Approx 10 ms OOT93 at 50 Hz Approx 10 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Times Use in function group Line Pickup time Approx 10 ms OOT94 at 50 Hz Approx 9 ms OOT at 60 Hz Use in other funct...

Page 1194: ...A Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 5 V Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 11 45 Measuring Voltage Failure Detection 1194 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1195: ...y rated voltage Measuring range Frequency range 100 V bis 125 V 0 1 to 2 Vrated 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated 50 Hz 59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 1 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 3 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Currents Instrument T...

Page 1196: ...frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 1 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 3 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Phase Angle ΦU Frequency range 47 5 Hz to 52 5 Hz at frated 50 Hz 57 5 Hz to 62 5 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance ΦU 0 2 at rated voltage ΦI Frequency ra...

Page 1197: ...nge 0 01 to 2 Srated 0 8 to 1 2 Vrated 0 01 to 2 Irated 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated 50 Hz 59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 3 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 5 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency Frequency f Hz Range frated 0 20 Hz...

Page 1198: ...to 9 2e 15 Operating hours h Range 0 to 9999999 h Tolerance 1 h Circuit breaker open hours h Range 0 to 9999999 h Tolerance 1 h Statistical Values of the Disconnector Op cnt operation counter Range 0 to 999999999 Tolerance None Technical Data 11 46 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 1198 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1199: ...d value in the above mentioned measuring range Reactive energy Wq kvarh Mvarh Gvarh Measuring range Voltage range Current range Frequency range cosφ 0 984 0 8 to 1 2 Vrated 0 1 to 2 Irated 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated 50 Hz 59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 1 0 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 69 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at ...

Page 1200: ...FC chart you can use the following formula Tchart 5 nInp 5 nOutp TTLev i Tint j TBlock where nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart TTLev 101 Ticks in Fast Event Triggered Level 104 Ticks in Event Triggered Level 54 Ticks in Measurement Level 74 Ticks in Interlocking Level Tint Number of internal connections between...

Page 1201: ...7 CON_ACT 0 5 CONNECT 0 4 COS_R 2 5 CTD 1 8 CTU 1 6 CTUD 2 3 DINT_REAL 3 0 DINT_UINT 3 0 DIV_D 2 9 DIV_R 1 6 DIV_XMV 2 2 DPC_DEF 0 4 DPC_EXE 0 4 DPC_INFO 1 1 DPC_OUT 1 3 DPS_SPS 1 0 DRAGI_R 1 7 EQ_D 1 0 EQ_R 1 9 EXP_R 1 5 EXPT_R 2 7 F_TRGM 0 3 F_TRIG 0 3 FF_D 0 9 FF_D_MEM 1 4 FF_RS 0 7 FF_RS_MEM 1 2 FF_SR 0 8 FF_SR_MEM 1 1 GE_D 0 9 Technical Data 11 48 CFC SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Ma...

Page 1202: ...IN_D 0 7 MIN_R 1 3 MOD_D 1 5 MUL_D4 2 5 MUL_R4 2 7 MUL_XMV 2 8 MUX_D 1 2 MUX_R 0 9 NAND10 3 5 NE_D 0 9 NE_R 0 9 NEG 1 2 NEG_SPS 0 8 NL_LZ 3 8 NL_MV 5 6 NL_ZP 2 7 NOR10 3 2 OR_DYN 1 1 OR_SPS 1 3 OR10 2 6 R_TRGM 0 4 R_TRIG 0 4 REAL_DINT 3 0 REAL_SXMV 3 0 SIN_R 0 8 SPC_DEF 0 4 SPC_EXE 0 4 SPC_INFO 0 4 Technical Data 11 48 CFC 1202 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edit...

Page 1203: ...SPS 0 8 SPLIT_WYE 2 6 SPLIT_XMV 2 1 SQRT_R 0 6 SUB_D 1 3 SUB_R 1 6 SUB_XMV 2 4 SUBST_B 1 0 SUBST_BQ 1 5 SUBST_D 1 0 SUBST_R 1 0 SUBST_XQ 1 4 SXMV_REAL 3 0 TAN_R 1 1 TLONG 2 2 TOF 1 0 TON 1 1 TT 2 5 TSHORT 1 9 UINT_DINT 3 0 XOR2 2 6 Technical Data 11 48 CFC SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1203 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1204: ...1204 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1205: ...andard Variants for 6MD85 1212 A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 1217 A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1223 A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1231 A 8 Connection Examples for Special Applications 1237 A SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1205 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1206: ...etailed presentation of the configuration result are provided The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an order number Ordering Options The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products Device Single part DIGSI 5 Functional enhancement i i NOTE To order single parts in the order configurator use the Single part link Individual parts are Exp...

Page 1207: ...ver for current terminal block Terminal Cover for voltage terminal block Terminal Cover for empty plug in module positions Terminal Transport safety current terminal Terminal Transport safety voltage terminal Accessories USB covers 10 pieces each for CP 100 200 300 Accessories Cable integrated operation panel 0 43 m Accessories Cable detached operation panel 2 50 m Accessories Cable detached opera...

Page 1208: ...rotection Point sensor with line length of 10 m Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 15 m Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 20 m Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 35 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor length 3 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor length 10 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor length 20 m Senso...

Page 1209: ...rameter Parameters with setting values The default setting is in the 1st position and displayed in italics Parameters with application dependent setting values Dynamic settings State logic Health of a function stage or function block External binary input signal with indication number External output signal with indication number and additional information External output signal without indication...

Page 1210: ...hold stage shortfall Threshold stage shortfall with reset of input Threshold stage exceeded with dropout delay Threshold stage exceeded with dropout delay and reset of input Threshold stage shortfall with Dropout delay Threshold stage shortfall with dropout delay and reset of input Comparators Pickup delay Dropout delay Pickup and dropout delay Appendix A 3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 1210 ...

Page 1211: ...e Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal edge SR Flip Flop RS Flip Flop D Flip Flop Characteristic curve Minimum operate time Appendix A 3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1211 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1212: ...ants for 6MD85 Type 1 Sv85Typ1 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 1 Standard Variant Type 1 A 4 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 6MD85 1212 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1213: ...Type 2 Sv85Typ2 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 2 Standard Variant Type 2 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 6MD85 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1213 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1214: ...Type 4 Sv85Typ4 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 3 Standard Variant Type 4 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 6MD85 1214 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1215: ...Type 6 Sv85Typ6 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 4 Standard Variant Type 6 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 6MD85 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1215 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1216: ...Type 7 Sv85Typ7 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 5 Standard Variant Type 7 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 6MD85 1216 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1217: ...ants for 6MD86 Type 1 Sv86Typ1 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 6 Standard Variant Type 1 A 5 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1217 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1218: ...Type 2 Sv86Typ2 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 7 Standard Variant Type 2 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 1218 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1219: ...Type 4 Sv86Typ4 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 8 Standard Variant Type 4 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1219 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1220: ...Type 6 Sv86Typ6 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 9 Standard Variant Type 6 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 1220 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1221: ...Type 7 sv86Typ7 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 10 Standard Variant Type 7 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1221 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1222: ...Type 8 Sv86Typ8 140813 01 1 en_US Figure A 11 Standard Variant Type 8 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 6MD86 1222 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1223: ...nnection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and Measured Zero Sequence Current Current in Common Return Path i i NOTE The switchover of current polarity at the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I4 IN A 6 Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1223 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edi...

Page 1224: ...he 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I4 IN sep tileite4 260313 01 tif 3 en_US Figure A 15 Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current from a Complete Holmgreen Connection Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1224 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Editio...

Page 1225: ...ileite5 060313 01 tif 3 en_US Figure A 16 Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and Measured Residual Current from the Current Transformer Neutral Point of the Respective Parallel Line for Parallel Line Compensation Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1225 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1226: ...oint Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer tileite7 070211 01 tif 3 en_US Figure A 18 Connection to a 2 Wire Current Transformer for Isolated or Resonant Grounded Systems Only Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1226 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1227: ...arity at the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I4 IN sep tileite9 260313 01 tif 3 en_US Figure A 20 Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and an Additional Current Transformer in the Neutral Point of a Grounded Power Transformer Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Ma...

Page 1228: ...aration tileit11 060313 01 tif 3 en_US Figure A 22 Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer in the Neutral Point of a Generator and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection of the Line Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1228 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1229: ...Current Transformer Connection for High Impedance Differential Protection Example a Power Transformer Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1229 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1230: ...ound Fault Detection via the Neutral Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer i i NOTE The switchover of current polarity at the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I3 IN sep Appendix A 6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1230 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 201...

Page 1231: ...r Connected Voltage Transformers tvvolta2 260313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 26 Connection to 3 Star Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken Delta Winding A 7 Appendix A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1231 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1232: ...ted Voltage Transformers and to the Broken Delta Winding of a Separate Voltage Transformer for example Busbar Appendix A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1232 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1233: ...Transformers and to the Phase to Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer for Example for Synchrocheck Applications Appendix A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1233 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1234: ...ction to the Phase to Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer i i NOTE When using the connection type 3 phase to phase voltage the zero sequence voltage cannot be detected Appendix A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1234 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1235: ...the Broken Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer tvvol2ll 260313 01 tif 2 en_US Figure A 31 Connection to V Connected Voltage Transformer Measurement of 2 Phase to Phase Voltages Appendix A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1235 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1236: ...n to the Broken Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer tvvolta7 260313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 33 Connection to a 1 Pole Insulated Voltage Transformer Phase to Ground Voltage Appendix A 7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1236 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1237: ... dw15ls3p 170311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 34 Connection Example for a 1 1 2 Circuit Breaker Layout A 8 Appendix A 8 Connection Examples for Special Applications SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual 1237 C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1238: ...1238 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1239: ... multiple inputs The bit pattern length can be chosen from 1 to 6 bytes BRCB See Buffered Report Control Block Buffered Report Control Block Buffered Report Control Block BRCB is a form of report controlling Internal events trigger the immediate sending of reports or saving of events for the transfer Data values cannot therefore be lost on account of transport flow control conditions or connection...

Page 1240: ...tial difference from conventional program ming languages where sequences of commands are entered Control display The control display becomes visible for devices with a large display after pressing the Control key The diagram contains the switching devices to be controlled in the feeder The control display serves for implementing switching operations Specification of this diagram forms part of conf...

Page 1241: ...ion Protocol DIGSI Configuration software for SIPROTEC Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol The DCP protocol is used to detect devices without IP addresses and to assign addresses to these devices DM See Double Point Indication Double Command Double commands DC are process outputs which the on and off command can give separated on different binary outputs Double point indication Double point...

Page 1242: ...ys only possible to log a line interrup tion on the receive line If a line interruption is detected the link status of the line is changed The status change leads to deletion of the MAC address assigned to the port in the switch However outage of the receive line from the aspect of the switch can only be detected in the receiver that is by the switch The receiver then immediately blocks the transm...

Page 1243: ...s and measuring for grounding Hierarchy Level In a structure with superordinate and subordinate objects a hierarchy level is a level of equal ranking objects High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol Like PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol HSR High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol is specified in IEC 62439 3 Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time The principal function ...

Page 1244: ... sent from the protocol slave to the protocol master International Electrotechnical Commission See IEC Internet protocol An Internet protocol IP enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks IP See Internet protocol LAN See Local Area Network Link Address The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device List view The right area of the project window d...

Page 1245: ...a time span In the power supply utility field electrical energy is often recorded as a metered value energy import delivery energy transport MIB See Management Information Base MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement MMS See Manufacturing Message Specification Model Implementation Conformance Statement Model Implementation Conformance Statement see MICS The Model Implementation Conformance...

Page 1246: ...PRP offers uninterruptible switching which avoids any down time in the event of a fault and thus the highest availability PRP is based on the following approach The redundancy procedure is generated in the end device itself The principle is simple The redundant end device has 2 Ethernet interfaces with the same address DAN Double Attached Node Now the same message is sent twice in the case of PRP ...

Page 1247: ...one of these SFC Sequential Function Chart and ST Structured Text are others Programmable Logic Controller Programmable logic controllers PLC are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the control unit The construction and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control The programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer it consists...

Page 1248: ...e reduced to several 100 milliseconds for RSTP Real Time Real time Reorganize The frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas which are no longer used The reorgani zation of projects allows these memory areas to be freed up again The reorganization also leads to VD addresses being reassigned This results in all SIPROTEC devices having to be reinitialized RSTP See Rapid Spanni...

Page 1249: ...ications which visualize 2 process states for example On Off at an input SIPROTEC 5 device This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data SIPROTEC 5 Variant This object type represents a variant of an object of the SIPROTEC device type The device data of this variant can differ from the device data of the original object However all varian...

Page 1250: ... event for example in a log file Time stamps ensure that events can be found again Topological View The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system for example switchgear and their relation to one another The Topological View describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form Transformer tap indication The transformer tap indication TM is a processing function The trans...

Page 1251: ...chanisms The advantage of UDP in comparison to IP is the higher transmission rate UTC Universal Time Coordinated Value Indication Value indications are single point indications in which a further value is transferred in addition to the actual indication example Fault locator Here the distance to the fault point is also indicated in addition to the fault statement Yes No Virtual Bay Device A virtua...

Page 1252: ...1252 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Page 1253: ...uit Breaker Condition 569 B Battery fault 986 C Check of the voltage control function 1079 Checking the transformer tap position 1076 Circuit breaker Circuit breaker failure protection 209 227 Circuit breaker test 209 227 Termination of the trip command 230 Trip logic 230 Trip Logic 213 Trip circuit supervision 209 227 Trip Command Reset 213 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP 516 Circulating ...

Page 1254: ...Manual updating 147 Master Follower method 470 Method of minimizing circulating reactive current 472 Motor starting log 66 N Negative sequence protection 871 O Operational log 55 Operational measured values 997 Optical fiber Multimode 102 Multiplexer 102 Repeater 102 Singlemode 102 Order configurator 1206 Ordering Accessories 1207 Individual components 1206 Other Functions Acquisition Blocking 143...

Page 1255: ... measurement point switching 372 Synchronization of asynchronous systems 383 391 Synchronization of synchronous systems 381 Synchronization of Synchronous Systems 389 Synchronization stage 365 T Temperature Monitoring Application and Setting Notes 903 Technical Data 1175 Temperature supervision Function description 903 Function structure 902 Overview of functions 902 Test of the line compensation ...

Page 1256: ...1256 SIPROTEC 5 High Voltage Bay Controller Manual C53000 G5040 C015 9 Edition 11 2017 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 6MD85

Brand: Valve Concepts Pages: 16

ESSENSSE NEO COMFORT

Brand: 2VV Pages: 21

AirGENIO SUPERIOR

Brand: 2VV Pages: 27

Brand: tau Pages: 9

Brand: tau Pages: 8

Brand: Vageo Pages: 2

Brand: Vacon Pages: 6

Brand: Vacon Pages: 24

Brand: Vacon Pages: 30

Brand: Vacon Pages: 81

Brand: Vacon Pages: 100

Brand: ABB Pages: 17

Brand: Pfeiffer Vacuum Pages: 100

Brand: Sames Pages: 84

UNDER CONTROL CP-28

Brand: G-Force Pages: 2

Brand: Hanma Pages: 3

MXI-Express Gen-3 x16

Brand: National Instruments Pages: 38

EtherNetIP ControlPlex CPC12EN

Brand: E-T-A Pages: 7

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands